Nikon COOLPIX P510, 26329 Reference guide

Nikon COOLPIX P510, 26329 Reference guide
DIGITAL CAMERA
Reference Manual
En
Trademark Information
• Microsoft, Windows and Windows Vista are either registered trademarks or
trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.
• Macintosh, Mac OS, and QuickTime are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the
U.S. and other countries. The iFrame logo and the iFrame symbol are trademarks
of Apple Inc.
• Adobe and Acrobat are registered trademarks of Adobe Systems Inc.
• SDXC, SDHC and SD Logos are trademarks of SD-3C, LLC.
• PictBridge is a trademark.
• HDMI,
logo and High-Definition Multimedia Interface are
trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC.
• All other trade names mentioned in this manual or the other documentation
provided with your Nikon product are trademarks or registered trademarks of
their respective holders.
AVC Patent Portfolio License
This product is licensed under the AVC Patent Portfolio License for the personal and
non-commercial use of a consumer to (i) encode video in compliance with the AVC
standard (“AVC video”) and/or (ii) decode AVC video that was encoded by a
consumer engaged in a personal and non-commercial activity and/or was
obtained from a video provider licensed to provide AVC video. No license is granted
or shall be implied for any other use. Additional information may be obtained from
MPEG LA, L.L.C.
See http://www.mpegla.com.
Introduction
Parts of the Camera and Basic Operations
The Basics of Shooting and Playback
Shooting Features
Playback Features
Recording and Playing Back Movies
Using GPS
General Camera Setup
Reference Section
Technical Notes and Index
i
Introduction
Read This First
Introduction
Thank you for purchasing the Nikon COOLPIX P510 digital camera.
Before using the camera, please read the information in “For Your Safety” (Avi) and
familiarize yourself with the information provided in this manual. After reading,
please keep this manual handy and refer to it to enhance your enjoyment of your
new camera.
Confirming the Package Contents
In the event that any items are missing, please contact the store where you
purchased the camera.
COOLPIX P510
Digital Camera
Camera Strap
Lens Cap LC-CP24
(with cord)
Rechargeable Li-ion
Battery EN-EL5
(with terminal cover)
Charging AC Adapter
EH-69P*
USB Cable UC-E6
Audio Video Cable EG-CP16
ViewNX 2 Installer CD
Reference Manual CD
• Warranty
* A plug adapter is included if the camera was purchased in a country or region that requires
a plug adapter. The shape of the plug adapter varies with the country or region of
purchase.
NOTE: A memory card is not included with the camera.
ii
Read This First
About This Manual
Other Information
• Symbols and Conventions
To make it easier to find the information you need, the following symbols and
conventions are used in this manual:
Icon
Introduction
If you want to start using the camera right away, see “The Basics of Shooting and
Playback” (A17).
To learn about the parts of the camera and basic operations, see “Parts of the
Camera and Basic Operations” (A1).
Description
B
This icon indicates cautions and information that should be read before
using the camera.
C
This icon marks notes, information that should be read before using the camera.
A/E/F
These icons indicate other pages containing relevant information;
E: “Reference Section”, F: “Technical Notes and Index.”
• SD, SDHC and SDXC memory cards are referred to as “memory cards” in this manual.
• The setting at the time of purchase is referred to as the “default setting.”
• The names of menu items displayed in the camera monitor, and the names of
buttons or messages displayed on a computer monitor appear in bold.
• In this manual, images are sometimes omitted from monitor and viewfinder
display samples so that monitor indicators can be more clearly shown.
• Illustrations and monitor content shown in this manual may differ from the
actual product.
iii
Read This First
Information and Precautions
Life-Long Learning
Introduction
As part of Nikon’s “Life-Long Learning” commitment to ongoing product support and education,
continually updated information is available online at the following sites:
• For users in the U.S.A.: http://www.nikonusa.com/
• For users in Europe and Africa: http://www.europe-nikon.com/support/
• For users in Asia, Oceania, and the Middle East: http://www.nikon-asia.com/
Visit these sites to keep up-to-date with the latest product information, tips, answers to frequently
asked questions (FAQs), and general advice on digital imaging and photography. Additional
information may be available from the Nikon representative in your area. Visit the site below for
contact information:
http://imaging.nikon.com/
Use Only Nikon Brand Electronic Accessories
Nikon COOLPIX cameras are designed to the highest standards and include complex electronic
circuitry. Only Nikon brand electronic accessories (including battery chargers, batteries, Charging AC
Adapter and AC adapters) certified by Nikon specifically for use with this Nikon digital camera are
engineered and proven to operate within the operational and safety requirements of this electronic
circuitry.
THE USE OF NON-NIKON ELECTRONIC ACCESSORIES COULD DAMAGE THE CAMERA AND MAY
VOID YOUR NIKON WARRANTY.
The use of third-party rechargeable Li-ion batteries not bearing the Nikon holographic seal could
interfere with normal operation of the camera or result in the batteries overheating, igniting,
rupturing, or leaking.
For more information about Nikon brand accessories, contact a local authorized Nikon dealer.
Holographic seal: Identifies this
device as an authentic Nikon product.
Before Taking Important Pictures
Before taking pictures on important occasions (such as at weddings or before taking the camera on
a trip), take a test shot to ensure that the camera is functioning normally. Nikon will not be held liable
for damages or lost profits that may result from product malfunction.
About the User’s Manual
iv
• No part of the documentation included with this product may be reproduced, transmitted,
transcribed, stored in a retrieval system, or translated into any language in any form, by any means,
without Nikon’s prior written permission.
• Nikon will not be held liable for any damages resulting from the use of this product.
• Nikon reserves the right to change the specifications of the hardware and software described in
the documentation at any time and without prior notice.
• While every effort was made to ensure that the information in the documentation is accurate and
complete, we would appreciate it were you to bring any errors or omissions to the attention of the
Nikon representative in your area (address provided separately).
Read This First
Notice Concerning Prohibition of Copying or Reproduction
Note that simply being in possession of material that was digitally copied or reproduced by means
of a scanner, digital camera or other device may be punishable by law.
Introduction
• Items prohibited by law from being copied or reproduced
Do not copy or reproduce paper money, coins, securities, government bonds or local government
bonds, even if such copies or reproductions are stamped “Sample.” The copying or reproduction of
paper money, coins, or securities which are circulated in a foreign country is prohibited. Unless the
prior permission of the government was obtained, the copying or reproduction of unused postage
stamps or post cards issued by the government is prohibited.
The copying or reproduction of stamps issued by the government and of certified documents
stipulated by law is prohibited.
• Cautions on certain copies and reproductions
The government has issued cautions on copies or reproductions of securities issued by private
companies (shares, bills, checks, gift certificates, etc.), commuter passes, or coupon tickets, except
when a minimum of necessary copies are to be provided for business use by a company. Also, do
not copy or reproduce passports issued by the government, licenses issued by public agencies and
private groups, ID cards and tickets, such as passes and meal coupons.
• Comply with copyright notices
The copying or reproduction of copyrighted creative works such as books, music, paintings,
woodcut prints, maps, drawings, movies, and photographs is governed by national and international
copyright laws. Do not use this product for the purpose of making illegal copies or to infringe
copyright laws.
Disposing of Data Storage Devices
Please note that deleting images or formatting data storage devices such as memory cards or
built-in camera memory does not completely erase the original image data. Deleted files can
sometimes be recovered from discarded storage devices using commercially available software,
potentially resulting in the malicious use of personal image data. Ensuring the privacy of such data is
the user’s responsibility.
Before discarding a data storage device or transferring ownership to another person, erase all data
using commercial deletion software, or format the device and then completely refill it with images
containing no private information (for example, pictures of empty sky). Be sure to also replace any
pictures selected for the Select an image option in the Welcome screen setting (A108). Care
should be taken to avoid injury or damage to property when physically destroying data storage
devices.
For the COOLPIX P510, the log data saved on the memory card is handled in the same way as other
data. You can delete unsaved log data from the memory card using Create log ➝ End log ➝ Erase
log.
v
For Your Safety
To prevent damage to your Nikon product or injury to yourself or to others, read
the following safety precautions in their entirety before using this equipment.
Keep these safety instructions where all those who use the product will read them.
Introduction
This icon marks warnings, information that should be read before using this Nikon
product, to prevent possible injury.
WARNINGS
Turn off in the event of
malfunction
Should you notice smoke or an unusual
smell coming from the camera or
Charging AC Adapter, unplug the
Charging AC Adapter and remove the
battery immediately, taking care to
avoid burns. Continued operation
could result in injury. After removing or
disconnecting the power source, take
the equipment to a Nikon-authorized
service representative for inspection.
Do not disassemble
Touching the internal parts of the
camera or Charging AC Adapter could
result in injury. Repairs should be
performed only by qualified
technicians. Should the camera or
Charging AC Adapter break open as the
result of a fall or other accident, take the
product to a Nikon-authorized service
representative for inspection, after
unplugging the product and/or
removing the battery.
vi
Do not use the camera or
Charging AC Adapter in the
presence of flammable gas
Using the camera in the presence of
flammable gases such as propane and
gasoline, as well as flammable sprays or
dust could result in explosion or fire.
Handle the camera strap with
care
Never place the strap around the neck
of an infant or child.
Keep out of reach of children
Do not keep the products within reach
of children. Doing so may cause injury.
Particular care should be taken to
prevent infants from putting the
battery or other small parts into their
mouths.
Do not remain in contact with
the camera, Charging AC
Adapter, or AC adapter for
extended periods while the
devices are on or in use.
Parts of the devices become hot.
Leaving the devices in direct contact
with the skin for extended periods may
result in low-temperature burns.
For Your Safety
• If liquid from the damaged battery
comes in contact with clothing or
skin, rinse immediately with plenty
of water.
• If leaked battery fluid gets into your
eyes, rinse them out immediately
with clean running water and get
medical treatment.
• Do not attempt to charge batteries
that are not rechargeable.
•
•
•
•
•
Introduction
Observe caution when
handling the battery
The battery may leak, overheat, or
explode if improperly handled.
Observe the following precautions
when handling the battery for use in
this product:
• Before replacing the battery, turn the
product off. If you are using the
Charging AC Adapter/AC adapter, be
sure it is unplugged.
• Use only a Rechargeable Li-ion
Battery EN-EL5 (included). Charge
the battery by inserting it into the
camera and connecting the
Charging AC Adapter. EH-69P
(included).
• When inserting the battery, do not
attempt to insert it upside down or
backwards.
• Do not short or disassemble the
battery or attempt to remove or
break the battery insulation or
casing.
• Do not expose the battery to flame
or to excessive heat.
• Do not immerse in or expose to
water.
• Replace the terminal cover when
transporting the battery. Do not
transport or store with metal objects
such as necklaces or hairpins.
• The battery is prone to leakage when
fully discharged. To avoid damage to
the product, be sure to remove the
battery when no charge remains.
• Discontinue use immediately should
you notice any change in the battery,
such as discoloration or
deformation.
Observe the following
precautions when handling
the Charging AC Adapter
Keep dry. Failure to observe this
precaution could result in fire or
electric shock.
Dust on or near the metal parts of
the plug should be removed with a
dry cloth. Continued use could result
in fire.
Do not handle the plug or go near
the Charging AC Adapter during
lightning storms. Failure to observe
this precaution could result in
electric shock.
Do not damage, modify, forcibly tug
or bend the USB cable, place it under
heavy objects, or expose it to heat or
flames. Should the insulation be
damaged and the wires become
exposed, take it to a Nikonauthorized service representative for
inspection. Failure to observe these
precautions could result in fire or
electric shock.
Do not handle the plug or Charging
AC Adapter with wet hands. Failure
to observe this precaution could
result in electric shock.
vii
For Your Safety
Introduction
• Do not use with travel converters or
adapters designed to convert from
one voltage to another or with DCto-AC inverters. Failure to observe
this precaution could damage the
product or cause overheating or fire.
Use appropriate cables
When connecting cables to the input
and output jacks, use only the cables
provided or sold by Nikon for the
purpose, to maintain compliance with
product regulations.
Handle moving parts with care
Be careful that your fingers or other
objects are not pinched by the lens
cover or other moving parts.
CD-ROMs
The CD-ROMs included with this device
should not be played back on audio CD
equipment. Playing CD-ROMs on an
audio CD player could cause hearing
loss or damage the equipment.
Observe caution when using
the flash
Using the flash close to your subject’s
eyes could cause temporary visual
impairment. Particular care should be
observed if photographing infants,
when the flash should be no less than
1 m (3 ft 4 in.) from the subject.
Do not operate the flash with
the flash window touching a
person or object
Failure to observe this precaution could
result in burns or fire.
viii
Avoid contact with liquid
crystal
Should the monitor break, care should
be taken to avoid injury caused by
broken glass and to prevent liquid
crystal from the monitor touching the
skin or entering the eyes or mouth.
Turn the power off when using
inside an airplane or the
hospital
Turn the power off while inside the
airplane during take off or landing.
Also, before boarding an airplane, set
the GPS tracking information recording
function to OFF. Follow the instructions
of the hospital when using while in a
hospital. The electromagnetic waves
emitted by this camera may disrupt the
electronic systems of the airplane or
the instruments of the hospital.
3D Images
Do not continuously view 3D images
recorded with this device for extended
periods, whether on a television,
monitor, or other display.
In the case of children whose visual
systems are still maturing, consult a
pediatrician or ophthalmologist prior
to use and follow their instructions.
Prolonged viewing of 3D images may
cause eye strain, nausea, or discomfort.
Cease use should any of these
symptoms occur and consult a
physician if necessary.
Notices
Notices for Customers in the
U.S.A.
SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS.
DANGER - TO REDUCE THE RISK OF
FIRE OR ELECTRIC SHOCK,
CAREFULLY FOLLOW THESE
INSTRUCTIONS
For connection to a supply not in the
U.S.A., use an attachment plug adapter
of the proper configuration for the
power outlet if needed.
The power supply unit is intended to
be correctly orientated in a vertical or
floor mount position.
Introduction
IMPORTANT SAFETY
INSTRUCTIONS -
equipment does cause harmful
interference to radio or television
reception, which can be determined
by turning the equipment off and on,
the user is encouraged to try to correct
the interference by one or more of the
following measures:
• Reorient or relocate the receiving
antenna.
• Increase the separation between the
equipment and receiver.
• Connect the equipment into an
outlet on a circuit different from that
to which the receiver is connected.
• Consult the dealer or an
experienced radio/television
technician for help.
Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) Radio
Frequency Interference
Statement
This equipment has been tested and
found to comply with the limits for a
Class B digital device, pursuant to Part
15 of the FCC rules. These limits are
designed to provide reasonable
protection against harmful
interference in a residential installation.
This equipment generates, uses, and
can radiate radio frequency energy
and, if not installed and used in
accordance with the instructions, may
cause harmful interference to radio
communications. However, there is no
guarantee that interference will not
occur in a particular installation. If this
CAUTIONS
Modifications
The FCC requires the user to be
notified that any changes or
modifications made to this device that
are not expressly approved by Nikon
Corporation may void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.
Interface Cables
Use the interface cables sold or
provided by Nikon for your equipment.
Using other interface cables may
exceed the limits of Class B Part 15 of
the FCC rules.
ix
Notices
Introduction
Notice for Customers in the State of
California
WARNING
Handling the cord on this product will
expose you to lead, a chemical known
to the State of California to cause birth
defects or other reproductive harm.
Wash hands after handling.
Nikon Inc.,
1300 Walt Whitman Road,
Melville, New York 11747-3064
USA
Tel: 631-547-4200
Notice for Customers in Canada
CAUTION
This Class B digital apparatus complies
with Canadian ICES-003.
ATTENTION
Cet appareil numérique de la classe B
est conforme à la norme NMB-003 du
Canada.
x
Notices for Customers in Europe
CAUTIONS
RISK OF EXPLOSION IF BATTERY IS
REPLACED BY AN INCORRECT
TYPE.
DISPOSE OF USED BATTERIES
ACCORDING TO THE
INSTRUCTIONS.
This symbol indicates that
this product is to be collected
separately.
The following apply only to
users in European countries:
• This product is designated for
separate collection at an appropriate
collection point. Do not dispose of as
household waste.
• For more information, contact the
retailer or the local authorities in
charge of waste management.
This symbol on the battery
indicates that the battery is
to be collected separately.
The following apply only to
users in European countries:
• All batteries, whether marked with
this symbol or not, are designated for
separate collection at an appropriate
collection point. Do not dispose of as
household waste.
• For more information, contact the
retailer or the local authorities in
charge of waste management.
Table of Contents
Introduction .......................................................................................................................................... ii
Introduction
Read This First ........................................................................................................................................ ii
Confirming the Package Contents.............................................................................................................. ii
About This Manual............................................................................................................................................... iii
Information and Precautions........................................................................................................................ iv
For Your Safety...................................................................................................................................... vi
WARNINGS ............................................................................................................................................................... vi
Notices ..................................................................................................................................................... ix
Parts of the Camera and Basic Operations ................................................................................. 1
Parts of the Camera .............................................................................................................................. 2
The Camera Body.................................................................................................................................................. 2
Controls Used in Shooting Mode ............................................................................................................... 4
Controls Used in Playback Mode ................................................................................................................ 5
Changing the Angle of the Monitor ......................................................................................................... 6
Attaching the Camera Strap and Lens Cap .......................................................................................... 7
The Monitor.............................................................................................................................................................. 8
Basic Operations.................................................................................................................................. 11
Switching Between Shooting Mode and Playback Mode ........................................................ 11
Using the Rotary Multi Selector................................................................................................................. 12
Using Menus (the d Button) ................................................................................................................. 13
Switching the Information on the Monitor (s button)...................................................... 15
Switching the Monitor Display (x button) ..................................................................................... 16
Using the Viewfinder ........................................................................................................................................ 16
The Basics of Shooting and Playback ........................................................................................ 17
Preparation 1 Insert the Battery..................................................................................................... 18
Preparation 2 Charge the Battery.................................................................................................. 20
Preparation 3 Insert a Memory Card............................................................................................ 22
Internal Memory and Memory Cards..................................................................................................... 23
Approved Memory Cards .............................................................................................................................. 23
Step 1 Turn the Camera On ............................................................................................................. 24
Turning the Camera On and Off................................................................................................................ 25
Setting the Display Language, Date, and Time................................................................................ 26
Step 2 Select a Shooting Mode...................................................................................................... 28
Available Shooting Modes............................................................................................................................ 29
Step 3 Frame a Picture....................................................................................................................... 30
Using the Zoom................................................................................................................................................... 31
Step 4 Focus and Shoot .................................................................................................................... 32
Step 5 Play Back Images ................................................................................................................... 34
Changing How Images Are Displayed................................................................................................... 35
Step 6 Delete Unwanted Images................................................................................................... 36
xi
Table of Contents
Shooting Features ............................................................................................................................ 39
Introduction
A (Auto) Mode.................................................................................................................................... 40
Changing A (Auto) Mode Settings........................................................................................................ 40
Scene Mode (Shooting Suited to Scenes) .................................................................................. 41
Changing Scene Mode Settings................................................................................................................ 42
Characteristics of Each Scene ..................................................................................................................... 42
Using Skin Softening ........................................................................................................................................ 54
Special Effects Mode (Applying Effects When Shooting) ..................................................... 55
Characteristics of Each Special Effect ..................................................................................................... 55
Changing Special Effects Mode Settings............................................................................................. 56
j, k, l, m Modes (Setting the Exposure for Shooting)...................................................... 57
Changing j, k, l, m Modes.................................................................................................................... 60
Options Available in the Shooting Menu ............................................................................................ 60
M (User Setting Modes) .................................................................................................................... 63
Saving Settings in M Mode .......................................................................................................................... 64
Features That Can Be Set Using the Multi Selector................................................................. 65
Available Functions ........................................................................................................................................... 65
Using the Flash (Flash Modes) .................................................................................................................... 66
Using the Self-timer .......................................................................................................................................... 69
Smile Timer (Shooting Smiling Faces) ................................................................................................... 70
Using Focus Mode ............................................................................................................................................. 72
Adjusting Brightness (Exposure Compensation) ............................................................................ 74
List of the Default Settings............................................................................................................................ 75
Changing the Image Quality and Image Size ........................................................................... 77
Available Image Quality.................................................................................................................................. 77
Available Image Size ......................................................................................................................................... 78
Features That Cannot Be Used Simultaneously ....................................................................... 80
The Control Range of the Shutter Speed (j, k, l, m Modes) ............................................ 83
Focusing on Subject........................................................................................................................... 84
Using the Target Finding AF ........................................................................................................................ 84
Using Face Detection....................................................................................................................................... 85
Focus Lock............................................................................................................................................................... 86
Playback Features............................................................................................................................. 87
Features Available in Playback Mode (Playback Menu) ........................................................ 88
Connecting the Camera to a TV, Computer, or Printer.......................................................... 90
Using ViewNX 2.................................................................................................................................... 91
Installing ViewNX 2............................................................................................................................................ 91
Transferring Images to the Computer ................................................................................................... 93
Viewing Images ................................................................................................................................................... 94
xii
Table of Contents
Recording and Playing Back Movies.......................................................................................... 95
Using GPS .......................................................................................................................................... 101
Starting GPS Data Recording....................................................................................................... 102
Changing the GPS Settings (GPS Options Menu)................................................................. 105
Introduction
Recording Movies ............................................................................................................................... 96
Changing Movie Recording Settings (Movie Menu) .................................................................... 99
Playing Back Movies........................................................................................................................ 100
General Camera Setup.................................................................................................................. 107
The Setup Menu ............................................................................................................................... 108
Reference Section........................................................................................................................ E1
Taking Pictures with Manual Focus ......................................................................................... E2
Using Easy Panorama (Shooting and Playing back) .......................................................... E3
Taking Pictures with Easy Panorama................................................................................................. E3
Viewing Easy Panorama (Scroll) ........................................................................................................... E5
Using Panorama Assist................................................................................................................. E6
Using 3D Photography................................................................................................................. E8
j, k, l, m Modes ..................................................................................................................... E10
j (Programmed auto), k (Shutter-priority auto) or
l (Aperture-priority auto)................................................................................................................... E10
m (Manual) Mode..................................................................................................................................... E11
Playing and Deleting Images Captured Using Continuous Shooting Mode
(Sequence)..................................................................................................................................... E13
Playing Images in a Sequence........................................................................................................... E13
Deleting Images in a Sequence........................................................................................................ E14
Editing Still Images..................................................................................................................... E15
Editing Features .......................................................................................................................................... E15
k Quick Retouch: Enhancing Contrast and Saturation................................................... E17
I D-Lighting: Enhancing Brightness and Contrast ............................................................ E17
e Skin Softening: Softening Skin Tones .................................................................................... E18
p Filter Effects: Applying Digital Filter Effects .......................................................................... E19
g Small Picture: Reducing the Size of an Image.................................................................. E20
j Black Border: Adding a Black Border to Pictures ............................................................. E21
a Crop: Creating a Cropped Copy................................................................................................. E22
Connecting the Camera to a TV (Viewing Images on a TV) ........................................ E23
Connecting the Camera to a Printer (Direct Print) .......................................................... E25
Connecting the Camera to a Printer.............................................................................................. E26
Printing Individual Images ................................................................................................................... E27
Printing Multiple Images....................................................................................................................... E28
xiii
Table of Contents
Introduction
xiv
Editing Movies.............................................................................................................................. E31
Extracting Only the Desired Portions of the Movie.............................................................. E31
Saving a Frame from a Movie as a Still Picture ........................................................................ E32
Shooting Menu (j, k, l or m Mode) ................................................................................ E33
Image Quality and Image Size........................................................................................................... E33
Picture Control (COOLPIX Picture Control) ................................................................................ E33
Custom Picture Control (COOLPIX Custom Picture Control).......................................... E37
White Balance (Adjusting Hue) ......................................................................................................... E38
Metering.......................................................................................................................................................... E40
Continuous Shooting.............................................................................................................................. E41
ISO Sensitivity............................................................................................................................................... E45
Exposure Bracketing ................................................................................................................................ E46
AF Area Mode .............................................................................................................................................. E47
Autofocus Mode......................................................................................................................................... E51
Flash Exp. Comp. ........................................................................................................................................ E52
Noise Reduction Filter............................................................................................................................. E52
Active D-Lighting....................................................................................................................................... E53
Save User Settings/Reset User Settings ....................................................................................... E53
Zoom Memory ............................................................................................................................................ E54
Startup Zoom Position ........................................................................................................................... E54
The Playback Menu .................................................................................................................... E55
a Print Order (Creating a DPOF Print Order) .......................................................................... E55
b Slide Show.............................................................................................................................................. E57
d Protect...................................................................................................................................................... E58
The Image Selection Screen ............................................................................................................... E59
f Rotate Image......................................................................................................................................... E60
E Voice Memo............................................................................................................................................. E61
h Copy (Copy Between Internal Memory and Memory Card) ................................... E62
C Sequence Display Options........................................................................................................... E63
x Choose Key Picture............................................................................................................................ E63
The Movie Menu.......................................................................................................................... E64
Movie Options ............................................................................................................................................. E64
Recording Movies in Slow Motion and Fast Motion (HS Movie).................................. E66
Autofocus Mode......................................................................................................................................... E68
GPS Setting Menu....................................................................................................................... E69
GPS Settings.................................................................................................................................................. E69
Create Log (Record the log of moving information) ........................................................... E71
View Log.......................................................................................................................................................... E73
Table of Contents
Introduction
The Setup Menu .......................................................................................................................... E74
Welcome Screen ........................................................................................................................................ E74
Time Zone and Date................................................................................................................................ E75
Monitor Settings......................................................................................................................................... E78
Print Date (Imprinting Date and Time on Pictures).............................................................. E79
Vibration Reduction ................................................................................................................................. E80
Motion Detection...................................................................................................................................... E81
AF Assist........................................................................................................................................................... E82
Digital Zoom................................................................................................................................................. E82
Assign Side Zoom Control ................................................................................................................... E83
Sound Settings............................................................................................................................................ E84
Auto Off ........................................................................................................................................................... E84
Format Memory/Format Card............................................................................................................ E85
Language........................................................................................................................................................ E85
TV Settings ..................................................................................................................................................... E86
Fn Button ........................................................................................................................................................ E87
Charge by Computer............................................................................................................................... E88
Toggle Av/Tv Selection........................................................................................................................... E90
Reset File Numbering.............................................................................................................................. E90
Blink Warning ............................................................................................................................................... E91
Filmstrip ........................................................................................................................................................... E92
Eye-Fi Upload ............................................................................................................................................... E93
Reverse Indicators ..................................................................................................................................... E94
Reset All ........................................................................................................................................................... E94
Firmware Version........................................................................................................................................ E97
File and Folder Names............................................................................................................... E98
Optional Accessories ............................................................................................................... E100
Error Messages ........................................................................................................................... E101
xv
Table of Contents
Technical Notes and Index ......................................................................................................... F1
Introduction
xvi
Caring for the Products................................................................................................................. F2
The Camera ....................................................................................................................................................... F2
The Battery......................................................................................................................................................... F3
Charging AC Adapter .................................................................................................................................. F4
The Memory Cards........................................................................................................................................ F5
Caring for the Camera ................................................................................................................... F6
Cleaning .............................................................................................................................................................. F6
Storage ................................................................................................................................................................. F6
Troubleshooting.............................................................................................................................. F7
Specifications ................................................................................................................................. F15
Supported Standards ................................................................................................................................ F18
Index .................................................................................................................................................. F19
Parts of the Camera and
Basic Operations
Parts of the Camera and Basic Operations
This chapter describes the parts of the camera and also explains the main
functions of each part and the basic camera operations.
Parts of the Camera ................................................2
The Camera Body ..........................................................................................2
Controls Used in Shooting Mode ............................................................4
Controls Used in Playback Mode .............................................................5
Changing the Angle of the Monitor .......................................................6
Attaching the Camera Strap and Lens Cap..........................................7
The Monitor.....................................................................................................8
Basic Operations.................................................. 11
Switching Between Shooting Mode and Playback Mode ........... 11
Using the Rotary Multi Selector............................................................. 12
Using Menus (the d Button) ............................................................. 13
Switching the Information on the Monitor (s button) ......... 15
Switching the Monitor Display (x button) .................................... 16
Using the Viewfinder................................................................................. 16
If you want to start using the camera right away, see “The Basics of Shooting
and Playback” (A17).
1
Parts of the Camera and Basic Operations
Parts of the Camera
The Camera Body
Flash raised
1
2 3 4
5
6
Parts of the Camera and Basic Operations
7
9 10 11 12
13 14
15
1
Eyelet for camera strap ................................7
2
Power switch/power-on lamp..............25
3
w (FUNC) button.................................... 110
4
Mode dial...........................................................28
5
Microphone (stereo) .............................. 88, 96
6
GPS antenna................................................. 103
7
Flash......................................................................66
8
m (flash pop-up) button ..........................66
9
USB/Audio video connector.......... 20, 90
10 HDMI mini connector (Type C)............90
11 Connector cover ................................... 20, 90
2
8
16
12
Power connector cover (for connection
with an optional AC Adapter).......E100
13 Shutter-release button.........................4, 32
Zoom control ..................................................31
f : Wide ...................................................31
g : Tele......................................................31
14
h: Thumbnail playback.................35
i : Playback zoom.............................35
j : Help ....................................................41
15
Self-timer lamp...............................................69
AF-assist illuminator.................................109
16 Lens
Parts of the Camera
1
2
3 4
5
6
7
8
16
15
19 20 21
Side zoom control..................................... 109
f : Wide ...................................................31
g : Tele......................................................31
11 c (playback) button.........................11, 34
1
2
Speaker ..........................................88, 100, 109
13 k (apply selection) button ...................12
3
x (monitor) button .................................16
14 d (menu) button....................................13
4
Diopter adjustment control...................16
15 l (delete) button.............................. 36, 100
5
Electronic viewfinder .................................16
16 Tripod socket
6
s (display) button ............................... 15
7
b (e movie-record) button
................................................................. 11, 34, 96
8
Command dial ...............................................57
19 Memory card slot .........................................22
9
Monitor..........................................................8, 28
20 Battery latch.............................................18, 19
Charge lamp....................................20, E89
10
Flash lamp......................................................... 66
21 Battery chamber............................................18
12
17
Parts of the Camera and Basic Operations
9 10 11 12 13 14
17 18
Rotary multi selector
(multi selector) ...............................................12
Battery-chamber/
memory card slot cover ...................18, 22
18 Cover latch................................................18, 22
3
Parts of the Camera
Controls Used in Shooting Mode
Control
Name
Mode dial
Main Function
A
Parts of the Camera and Basic Operations
Change the shooting mode.
28
Zoom control
Rotate toward g (i) (telephoto zoom
position) to zoom in, and rotate toward
f (h) (wide-angle position) to zoom
out.
31
Rotary multi
selector
See “Using the Rotary Multi Selector” for
more information.
12
Set the flexible program (during shooting
Command dial mode j) or shutter speed (during
shooting modes k or m).
d (menu)
button
Display and hide the menu.
57,
59,
110
13
When pressed halfway (i.e., if you stop
pressing when you feel resistance slightly):
ShutterSet focus and exposure.
32
release button When pressed all the way (i.e., if you press
the button all the way down): Release the
shutter.
w (FUNC)
button
Playback
button
Delete button
Display the setting menu of pre-assigned
function.
110
Play back images.
11,
34
Delete the last image that was saved.
36
b (e movieStart and stop movie recording.
record) button
4
96
Parts of the Camera
Control
Name
x (monitor)
button
Main Function
Switch the monitor display.
s (display) Switch the information displayed on the
button
monitor.
Use the function assigned with Assign
side zoom control.
16
15
109
Parts of the Camera and Basic Operations
Side zoom
control
A
Controls Used in Playback Mode
Control
Name
Main Function
A
Playback
button
• When the camera is turned off, press
25
and hold this button to turn the camera
on in playback mode.
• Return to shooting mode.
11
Zoom control
• Enlarge the image when rotated toward 35
g (i); display image thumbnail or the
calendar when rotated toward f (h).
• Adjust the volume for voice memo and 88,
movie playback.
100
Rotary multi
selector
See “Using the Rotary Multi Selector” for
more information.
12
Command dial
Switch the magnification of an enlarged
image.
35
Apply
selection
button
d (menu)
button
• Display individual images of a
sequence in full-frame.
• Scroll an image recorded with easy
panorama.
• Play back movies.
• Switch from image thumbnail or
zoomed image display to full-frame
playback mode.
E13
Display and hide the menu.
13
E3
100
12
5
Parts of the Camera
Control
Name
Delete button
A
Main Function
Delete images.
36
Return to shooting mode.
–
Switch the monitor display.
16
Shutterrelease button
Parts of the Camera and Basic Operations
b (e movierecord) button
x (monitor)
button
s (display) Switch the information displayed on the
button
monitor.
w (FUNC)
button
15
Display the shooting location of an image
during log recording (latitude, longitude,
E73
and current location of the movement
being tracked for creating a log).
Changing the Angle of the Monitor
The angle of the monitor can be lowered down to 82° or raised upward to 90°. This
is convenient when taking pictures with the camera held at high or low positions.
B
6
Notes on Monitor
• Do not apply excessive force when changing the angle of the monitor.
• The monitor cannot be moved horizontally.
• Put the monitor back in the original position when using in normal situations.
Parts of the Camera
Attaching the Camera Strap and Lens Cap
Attach the lens cap to the strap, and then attach the strap to the camera.
Parts of the Camera and Basic Operations
Attach the strap at two places.
B
Lens Cap
• Remove the lens cap before you shoot a picture.
• At times when you are not shooting pictures such as when the power is off, or while you are
carrying the camera, attach the lens cap to the camera to protect the lens.
• Do not attach other than the lens cap to the lens.
7
Parts of the Camera
The Monitor
• The information that is displayed on the monitor during shooting and playback
changes depending on the camera’s settings and state of use. Press the s
(display) button to hide or show the information on the monitor (A15).
Shooting Mode
47
46
Parts of the Camera and Basic Operations
4
45
5
7
44
2
43
11
9
6
3
1
8
14
12 13
15
10
16
42
17
41
29m 0s
18
19
20
21
23
39
1/250
F5.6
36
29
999
40
38
22
28
24
37
999
9999
35
8
34
33
32
31
30
27
25
26
Parts of the Camera
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
Shooting mode......................................28, 29
Focus mode......................................................73
Zoom indicator ..............................................31
Focus indicator...............................................32
AE/AF-L indicator....................................E7
Zoom memory...............................................62
Flash mode .......................................................67
Flash exp. comp.............................................62
Battery level indicator ................................24
Vibration reduction icon .......................108
Eye-Fi communication indicator
.............................................................. 111, E93
Log display.....................................................105
GPS reception ..............................................104
Noise reduction filter ......................................62
Noise reduction burst ....................................43
Motion detection icon ...........................109
View/hide histograms....................74, 108
“Date not set” indicator..................27, 108
Print date.........................................................108
Travel destination indicator.................108
Movie options (normal speed movies)
..................................................................................99
Movie options (HS movies).....................99
Movie length ...........................................96, 98
Image quality ..................................................77
Image size..........................................................78
Easy panorama.....................................................51
Number of exposures remaining
(still pictures)............................................24, 79
Internal memory indicator......................24
29 Aperture value............................................... 57
Focus area (for manual,
30 for center) ....................................32, 49, 50, 61
Focus area (for auto, target
31 finding AF)........................................................ 61
Focus area (for face detection,
32 pet detection) .........................52, 61, 70, 85
Focus area (for subject
33 tracking)............................................................. 61
34 Center-weighted area.................................... 61
35 Spot metering area .......................................... 61
36 Shutter speed................................................. 57
Parts of the Camera and Basic Operations
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
37 Exposure indicator............................................ 59
38 ISO sensitivity ..........................................30, 61
Exposure compensation value............ 74
Active D-Lighting......................................... 62
COOLPIX Picture Control............................. 60
White balance....................................................... 61
Continuous shooting mode............. 52, 61
Backlighting (HDR) ........................................... 44
Exposure bracketing....................................... 61
Hand-held/Tripod .....................................42, 47
Self-timer........................................................... 69
47 Smile timer .............................................................. 70
Pet portrait auto release .............................. 52
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
9
Parts of the Camera
Playback Mode
Full-frame display (A15)
1
24
23
Parts of the Camera and Basic Operations
19
18
25
2 3
15/05/2012 12:00
9999.JP
9999.JPG
26
5
6
100NIKON
0004.JPG
P
1/250 F5.6
7
22
21
20
8 9 10
17
ISO
999/ 999
16
15
14
13
999/ 999
9999/9999
1m 0s
1m 0s
a
b
4
11
+1.0
200
132
25
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
12
1
Date of recording......................................... 26
2
Time of recording ........................................ 26
3
Voice memo indicator............................... 88
4
Battery level indicator ............................... 24
5
8
Protect icon...................................................... 88
Eye-Fi communication indicator
..............................................................111, E93
Recorded GPS information indicator
...............................................................................104
Print order icon.............................................. 88
9
Image quality.................................................. 77
24 3D picture indicator.................................... 53
25 File number and type ........................E98
10 Image size......................................................... 78
11 Movie options .........................................96, 99
26 Folder name ............................................E98
27 Shooting mode1 ........................................... 29
12 Easy panorama indicator......................... 51
(a) Current image number/total
number of images................................ 34
13
(b) Movie length .........................................100
28 Aperture value ............................................... 32
29 Shutter speed ................................................. 32
6
7
14 Internal memory indicator ..................... 34
Easy panorama playback guide .....E5
15 Sequence playback guide ..............E13
Movie playback guide.............................100
1
2
10
Shooting information (A15)
4
16 Volume indicator ................................88, 100
17 Black border indicator ............................... 88
18 D-Lighting icon ............................................. 88
19 Quick retouch icon...................................... 88
20 Filter effects icon........................................... 88
21 Small picture ...................................88, E22
22 Skin softening icon...................................... 88
23 Sequence display .................................E13
30 Exposure compensation value ............ 74
31 ISO sensitivity.................................................. 61
Current image number/
32 total number of images ........................... 34
33 Histogram2
j is displayed when the shooting mode A, y, j, c, W, u or j is selected.
A histogram is a graph showing the distribution of tones in the image. The horizontal axis
corresponds to pixel brightness, with dark tones to the left and bright tones to the right.
The vertical axis shows the number of pixels.
Basic Operations
Switching Between Shooting Mode and Playback Mode
Shooting mode
Playback mode
15/05/2012 15:30
0004.JPG
25m 0s
1/250
F5.6
840
4/ 132
Parts of the Camera and Basic Operations
The camera has two modes of operation: Shooting mode, which is used for taking
pictures, and playback mode, which is used for viewing pictures.
Press the c (playback) button to switch between shooting mode and playback
mode.
• While using playback mode, you can also switch to shooting mode by pressing
the shutter-release button or the b (e movie-record) button.
Auto mode
• Rotate the mode dial and align an icon to the mark to select different shooting
modes (A28, 29).
11
Basic Operations
Using the Rotary Multi Selector
Operate by rotating the rotary multi selector, pressing up (H), down (I), left (J)
or right (K) on the rotary multi selector, or pressing the k button.
• The “rotary multi selector” is also referred to as the “multi selector” in this
manual.
When Using Shooting Mode
Parts of the Camera and Basic Operations
Rotate to set the aperture
value*/Select an item
Display m (flash mode)
(A66) menu
Display the o
(exposure
compensation) guide
(A74)
Apply selection
Display D (focus mode) menu (A72)
Display n (Self-timer/
Smile timer) menu
(A69, 70)
Auto
* The aperture value can be set in shooting mode l or m (A59). Items can be chosen
while a menu is displayed.
When Using Playback Mode
Select the previous
image1/Move the
displayed area when
the image is
magnified (A35).
Play back movies
(A100)2
1
2
15/05/2012 15:30
0004.JPG
Select the next
image1/Move the
displayed area
when the image is
magnified (A35).
4/ 132
Previous or next images can also be chosen by rotating the rotary multi selector.
When displaying image thumbnail or when the image is magnified, this button switches the
camera to full-frame playback mode.
When Displaying Menus
Select the item above*
Select the item on the
left/Return display to
the previous screen
Select the item
below*
12
Select the item on
the right/Display
sub-menu (apply
selection)
Apply selection
Shooting menu
Image quality
Image size
Picture Control
Custom Picture Control
White balance
Metering
Continuous
* Items above or below can also be chosen by rotating the rotary multi selector.
Basic Operations
Using Menus (the d Button)
When the d button is pressed while the shooting screen or playback screen is
displayed, the menu for the current mode is displayed. Once the menu is
displayed, various settings can be changed.
Shooting mode
Playback mode
15/05/2012 15:30
0004.JPG
F5.6
4/ 132
840
Playback menu
Shooting menu
Tabs
Image quality
Image size
Picture Control
Custom Picture Control
White balance
Metering
Continuous
Tabs
Shooting menu
j tab:
Displays the settings that can be changed
for the current shooting mode (A 28).
Depending on the current shooting mode,
the tab icon that is displayed will be
different.
D tab:
Displays movie recording settings.
z tab:
Displays the GPS setup menu (A105)
items.
Quick retouch
D-Lighting
Skin softening
Filter effects
Print order
Slide show
Protect
Parts of the Camera and Basic Operations
25m 0s
1/125
Playback menu
c tab:
Displays the settings available for the
playback mode.
z tab:
Displays the GPS setup menu (A105)
items.
z tab:
Displays the setup menu, where you can
change general settings.
z tab:
Displays the setup menu, where you can
change general settings.
13
Basic Operations
Switching Between Tabs
Shooting menu
Image quality
Image size
Picture Control
Custom Picture Control
White balance
Metering
Continuous
Parts of the Camera and Basic Operations
Press the rotary multi
selector J to highlight
the tab.
Shooting menu
Image quality
Image size
Picture Control
Custom Picture Control
White balance
Metering
Continuous
Press the rotary multi
selector H or I to select a
tab, and press the k
button or K.
Set up
Welcome screen
Time zone and date
Monitor settings
Print date
Vibration reduction
Motion detection
AF assist
The selected menu is
displayed.
Selecting Menu Items
Shooting menu
Metering
Image quality
Image size
Picture Control
Custom Picture Control
White balance
Metering
Continuous
Matrix
Center-weighted
Spot
Press the rotary multi
selector H or I to select
an item, and then press
K or the k button.
Press H or I to select an
item and then press the
k button.
C
When you finished
changing settings, press
the d (menu) button
to exit the menu.
Note on the Command Dial Operation When Menus are Displayed
Rotating the command dial when menus are displayed allows you to change the setting values of a
selected item. There are some setting values that cannot be changed using the command dial.
C
When the Menu Contains Two or More Pages
Shooting menu
Image quality
Image size
Picture Control
Custom Picture Control
White balance
Metering
Continuous
14
The scroll bar is displayed to indicate the current page.
Basic Operations
Switching the Information on the
Monitor (s button)
To switch the information displayed on the
monitor during shooting and playback, press
the s (display) button.
For Shooting
F5.6
840
Display information
Display the picture and the
shooting information.
25m 0s
1/250
840
F5.6
Movie frame
Display the range of a
movie in a frame.
Information hidden
Display the picture only.
For Playback
15/05/2012 15:30
0004.JPG
Parts of the Camera and Basic Operations
25m 0s
1/250
100NIKON
0004.JPG
P
1/250 F5.6
4/ 132
Display photo information
Display the picture taken and
the photo information.
ISO
4
+1.0
200
132
Display shooting
information
(except for movies)
Display the histogram and
shooting information*.
Information hidden
Display only the taken
picture.
* See A10 for more information on histogram and shooting information.
C
Histogram and Framing Grid Displays for Shooting
The display options for the monitor can be changed in Monitor settings in the setup menu
(A108). A histogram and framing grid are available as the display options.
15
Basic Operations
Switching the Monitor Display (x button)
Press the x (monitor) button to switch between the monitor and viewfinder.
Switch to the one that suits the shooting conditions.
Monitor
Viewfinder
25m 0s
1/250
Parts of the Camera and Basic Operations
16
F5.6
840
25m 0s
1/250
F5.6
840
Using the Viewfinder
Use the viewfinder to frame pictures when bright
light makes it difficult to see the display on the
monitor. Press the x button to switch to the
viewfinder.
When the image in the viewfinder is difficult to see,
adjust by rotating the diopter adjustment control
while looking through the viewfinder.
• Take care not to scratch your eye with your
fingertips or nails.
Diopter adjustment control
x button
Viewfinder
The Basics of Shooting and
Playback
Preparation
Shooting
Step 1 Turn the Camera On..............................................................................................24
Setting the Display Language, Date, and Time (First Use Only) .....................26
Step 2 Select a Shooting Mode.......................................................................................28
Step 3 Frame a Picture .......................................................................................................30
Step 4 Focus and Shoot.....................................................................................................32
The Basics of Shooting and Playback
Preparation 1 Insert the Battery .....................................................................................18
Preparation 2 Charge the Battery ..................................................................................20
Preparation 3 Insert a Memory Card.............................................................................22
Playback
Step 5 Play Back Images ....................................................................................................34
Step 6 Delete Unwanted Images ...................................................................................36
17
The Basics of Shooting and Playback
Preparation 1 Insert the Battery
Open the battery-chamber/memory card slot
cover.
2
Insert the included EN-EL5
battery (rechargeable Li-ion
battery).
The Basics of Shooting and Playback
1
• Use the battery to push the
orange battery latch down in the
direction indicated by the arrow
(1), and fully insert the battery
(2).
• When the battery is inserted
correctly, the battery latch will
lock the battery in place.
B
Battery latch
Inserting the Battery Correctly
Inserting the battery upside down or backwards could damage the camera. Be sure
to check that the battery is in the correct orientation.
3
Close the battery-chamber/memory card slot
cover.
• Charge the battery before the first use or when the
battery is running low (A20).
• While the battery-chamber/memory card slot cover is
open, the camera cannot be turned on. Additionally, the
battery inserted in the camera cannot be charged.
18
Preparation 1 Insert the Battery
Removing the Battery
Turn the camera off (A25) and be sure that the poweron lamp and the monitor have turned off before
opening the battery-chamber/memory card slot cover.
To eject the battery, open the battery-chamber/
memory card slot cover and push the orange battery
latch in the direction shown (1). Then, remove the
battery straight (2).
The Basics of Shooting and Playback
B
High Temperature Caution
The camera, battery, and memory card may be hot immediately after using the camera. Observe
caution when removing the battery or memory card.
B
Notes on Battery
• Be sure to read and follow the warnings of “For Your Safety” (Avi) thoroughly before using the
battery.
• Be sure to read and follow the warnings for “The Battery” (F3) before using the battery.
19
Preparation 2 Charge the Battery
1
Prepare the included Charging AC Adapter EH-69P.
If a plug adapter* is included with your camera, attach the plug adapter
to the plug on the Charging AC Adapter. Push the plug adapter firmly
until it is securely held in place. Once the two are connected, attempting
to forcibly remove the plug adapter could damage the product.
* The shape of the plug adapter varies according to the country or
region in which the camera was purchased.
The Charging AC Adapter comes with the plug adapter attached in
Argentina and Korea.
The Basics of Shooting and Playback
2
Make sure the battery is inserted in the camera, and then connect the
camera to the Charging AC Adapter in order of 1 to 3.
• Keep the camera turned off.
• When connecting the cable, be sure that the plug is properly oriented. Do not use
force when connecting the cable to the camera. When disconnecting the cable, do
not pull the plug at an angle.
• Close the battery-chamber/memory card slot cover.
Charge lamp
Electrical outlet
USB Cable UC-E6 (included)
•
•
•
•
3
When charging starts, the charge lamp flashes slowly in green.
About four hours and 30 minutes are required to charge a fully exhausted battery.
When the battery has been completely charged, the charge lamp turns off.
See “Understanding the Charge Lamp” (A21) for more information.
Disconnect the Charging AC Adapter from the electrical outlet and
then disconnect the USB cable.
• When the camera is connected to an electrical outlet with the Charging AC Adapter,
the camera cannot be turned on.
20
Preparation 2 Charge the Battery
Understanding the Charge Lamp
Status
Description
Flashes slowly (green)
The battery is charging.
Off
The battery is not charging. When charging is complete, the
charge lamp flashing slowly in green stops and is turned off.
• The ambient temperature is not suited to charging. Charge the
battery indoors with an ambient temperature of 5°C to 35°C
(41°F to 95°F).
Flashes quickly (green) • The USB cable or Charging AC Adapter is not properly
connected, or there is a problem with the battery. Disconnect
the USB cable or unplug the Charging AC Adapter and correctly
connect it again, or change the battery.
The Basics of Shooting and Playback
B
Notes on Charging AC Adapter
• Be sure to read and follow the warnings of “For Your Safety” (Avi) thoroughly before using the
Charging AC Adapter.
• Be sure to read thoroughly and follow the warnings for “Charging AC Adapter” (F4) before use.
B
Charging Using Computer or Battery Charger
• You can also charge the Rechargeable Li-ion Battery EN-EL5 by connecting the camera to a
computer (A90, 110).
• The EN-EL5 can be charged without using the camera by using the Battery Charger MH-61
(available separately; E100).
C
AC Power Source
• You can take pictures and play back images while using the AC Adapter EH-62A (available
separately; E100) to power the camera from an electrical outlet.
• Do not, under any circumstances, use another make or model of AC adapter other than EH-62A.
Failure to observe this precaution could result in overheating or damage to the camera.
21
Preparation 3 Insert a Memory Card
1
Confirm that the power-on lamp and the
monitor are turned off and open the batterychamber/memory card slot cover.
• Be sure to turn off the camera before opening the cover.
2
Insert the memory card.
The Basics of Shooting and Playback
• Slide the memory card until it clicks into
place.
B
Inserting the Memory Card
Correctly
Inserting the memory card upside down
or backwards could damage the camera
or the memory card. Be sure to confirm
that the memory card is in the correct
orientation.
Memory card slot
3
Close the battery-chamber/memory card slot
cover.
B
Formatting a Memory Card
• The first time you insert a memory card that has been used in another device into this camera, be
sure to format it with this camera.
• All data stored on a memory card is permanently deleted when the card is formatted. Be
sure to make copies of any data you wish to keep before formatting the memory card.
• To format a memory card, insert the memory card into the camera, press the d button and
select Format card from the setup menu (A108).
B
22
Note on Memory Cards
Refer to the documentation included with the memory card, as well as “The Memory Cards” (F5) in
“Caring for the Products”.
Preparation 3 Insert a Memory Card
Removing Memory Cards
Before opening the battery-chamber/memory card slot
cover, turn the camera off and confirm that the poweron lamp and the monitor are off.
Press the memory card in lightly with your finger (1) to
partially eject it, and then pull it out straight (2).
B
High Temperature Caution
The camera, battery, and memory card may be hot immediately
after using the camera. Observe caution when removing the battery or memory card.
Internal Memory and Memory Cards
Approved Memory Cards
The following Secure Digital (SD) memory cards have been tested and approved
for use in this camera.
• When recording a movie onto a memory card, a memory card with an SD speed
class of Class 6 or higher is recommended. If the transfer speed of the card is
slow, the movie recording may end unexpectedly.
SD memory cards
SDHC memory cards2
SanDisk
2 GB1
4 GB, 8 GB, 16 GB, 32 GB 64 GB
TOSHIBA
2 GB1
4 GB, 8 GB, 16 GB, 32 GB 64 GB
Panasonic
2 GB1
4 GB, 8 GB, 12 GB,
16 GB, 32 GB
Lexar
-
4 GB, 8 GB, 16 GB, 32 GB 64 GB, 128 GB
1
2
3
The Basics of Shooting and Playback
Camera data, including images and movies, can be saved in either the camera’s
internal memory (approximately 90 MB) or on a memory card. To use the camera’s
internal memory for shooting or playback, first remove the memory card.
SDXC memory cards3
48 GB, 64 GB
Before using a card reader or similar device, check that the device supports 2 GB cards.
SDHC-compliant. Before using a card reader or similar device, check that the
device supports SDHC.
SDXC-compliant. Before using a card reader or similar device, check that the
device supports SDXC.
• Contact the manufacturer for details on the above cards.
23
Step 1 Turn the Camera On
1
Remove the lens cap and press the power
switch to turn on the camera.
• If you are turning the camera on for the first time,
see “Setting the Display Language, Date, and
Time” (A26).
• The lens extends, and the monitor is turned on.
2
Check the battery level and number of exposures remaining.
Battery level indicator
The Basics of Shooting and Playback
25m 0s
1/250
F5.6
840
Number of exposures
remaining
Battery Level
Display
Description
b
Battery level high.
B
Battery level low. Prepare to charge or replace the battery.
N
Battery exhausted.
Cannot take pictures. Charge or replace the battery.
Number of Exposures Remaining
The number of exposures remaining is displayed.
• When a memory card is not inserted, C is displayed and pictures are recorded to the
internal memory (approx. 90 MB).
• The number of pictures that can be stored depends on the remaining capacity of the
internal memory or memory card, the image quality, and the image size (A77).
• The number of exposures remaining shown in the illustration differs from the actual
value.
C
24
Monitor Display
Press the s button to switch between showing and hiding the photo information or shooting
information that is displayed on the monitor (A15).
Step 1 Turn the Camera On
Turning the Camera On and Off
• When the camera is turned on, the power-on lamp (green) lights and the monitor
is turned on (the power-on lamp turns off when the monitor is turned on).
• To turn off the camera, press the power switch. Both the monitor and the
power-on lamp are turned off.
• To turn on the camera in playback mode, press and hold the c (playback)
button. At this time, the lens does not extend.
Power Saving Function (Auto Off)
If no operations are performed for a while, the monitor will turn off, the camera will enter standby
mode, and the power-on lamp will flash. If no operations are performed for another three minutes,
the camera will turn off automatically.
To turn on the monitor again in standby mode, perform either one of the following operations.
• Press the power switch, shutter-release button, c button, or b (e movie-record) button.
• Rotate the mode dial.
The Basics of Shooting and Playback
C
Flashes
No operations
performed.
No operations
performed.
3 min
25m 0s
1/250
F5.6
840
Camera enters
standby mode.
Camera turns off.
• The time that elapses before the camera enters standby mode can be changed using the Auto off
setting in the setup menu (A108).
• By default, the camera enters standby mode in about one minute when you are using shooting
mode or playback mode.
• If you are using the optional AC Adapter EH-62A, the camera enters standby mode after
30 minutes. This setting cannot be changed.
25
Step 1 Turn the Camera On
Setting the Display Language, Date, and Time
Dialogs for language selection and camera clock setting are displayed the first time
the camera is turned on.
1
Press the multi selector H or I
to choose the desired language
and press the k button.
Language
Multi selector
The Basics of Shooting and Playback
2
Press H or I to choose Yes and press the k
button.
Čeština
Dansk
Deutsch
English
Español
Ελληνικά
Cancel
Time zone and date
Choose time zone and
set date and time?
Yes
No
Cancel
3
Press J or K to select your
home time zone (Time zone),
and press the k button.
London
Casablanca
• See “Daylight Saving Time” (A27) for
more information.
Back
4
5
Press H or I to choose the date display order
and press the k button or K.
Press H, I, J or K to set date and time, and
press the k button.
Date format
Year/Month/Day
Month/Day/Year
Day/Month/Year
Date and time
D
M
• Choose an item: Press K or J (selected in the following
05
15
order: D (day) ➝ M (month) ➝ Y (year) ➝ hour ➝
15
10
minute). The item can also be chosen by rotating the
multi selector.
• Set the contents: Press H or I. Date and time can also
be set by rotating the command dial.
• Confirm the settings: Select the minute field and press the k button or K.
26
Y
2012
Edit
Step 1 Turn the Camera On
6
Press H or I to choose Yes and press the k
button.
Date and time
15/05/2012 15:10
• After finishing the setting, the lens extends slightly and
the shooting screen is displayed.
OK?
Yes
No
Daylight Saving Time
London
Casablanca
Back
C
Changing the Language Setting and the Date and Time Setting
• You can change these settings using the Language and Time zone and date settings in z setup
menu (A108).
• In the Time zone setting of Time zone and date in z setup menu, when the daylight saving
time function is enabled, the camera’s clock is set forward by one hour, and when disabled, set
back by one hour. When the x travel destination is set, the camera automatically calculates the
time difference between the travel destination and the w home time zone, and saves images
using the date and time of the travel destination.
• If you exit without setting the date and time, O flashes when the shooting screen is displayed. Use
the Time zone and date setting in the setup menu (A108) to set the date and time.
C
The Basics of Shooting and Playback
If daylight saving time is in effect, press the multi
selector H to enable the daylight saving time function
while setting the region in step 3.
W is displayed at the top of the monitor.
Press I to disable the daylight saving time function.
The Clock Battery
• The camera’s clock is powered by a backup battery that is separate from the camera’s main battery.
• The backup battery charges after about ten hours of charging when the main battery is inserted
into the camera or when the camera is connected to an optional AC adapter, and can store the set
date and time for several days.
• If the camera’s backup battery becomes exhausted, the date and time setting screen is displayed
when the camera is turned on. Set the date and time again. See step 2 of “Setting the Display
Language, Date, and Time” (A26) for more information.
C
Imprinting the Shooting Date in Printed Images
• Set the date and time before shooting.
• You can imprint the shooting date in images as they are captured by setting Print date in the
setup menu (A108).
• If you want the shooting date to be printed without using the Print date setting, print using the
ViewNX 2 software (A91).
27
Step 2 Select a Shooting Mode
Rotate the mode dial to select the shooting mode.
• The following describes how to take pictures in A (auto) mode as an example.
Rotate the mode dial to A.
Auto mode
The Basics of Shooting and Playback
• The camera switches to A (auto) mode and the shooting mode icon changes
to A.
Shooting mode icon
25m 0s
1/250
F5.6
• See “The Monitor” (A8) for more information.
28
840
Step 2 Select a Shooting Mode
Available Shooting Modes
j, k, l, m mode (A57)
Choose these modes for
greater control over
shutter speed and
aperture value.
Settings in the shooting
menu (A60) are available
to suit the shooting
conditions and the type of
shot you want to capture.
Setting combinations that
are frequently used for
shooting can be saved. The
saved settings can be
immediately retrieved for
shooting simply by rotating
the mode dial to M.
u Special effects
mode (A55)
Effects can be applied to
pictures during shooting.
Nine different effects are
available.
Scene mode (A41)
When one of the scene modes is selected, pictures are captured using settings that are
optimized for the selected scene.
y (Scene): Choose the desired scene from 16 different scene types using the scene
menu, and the camera’s settings are automatically optimized for the selected scene.
In scene auto selector mode, the camera automatically selects the optimum scene mode
for simpler shooting.
• To select a scene, first rotate the mode dial to y and press the d button.
Select the desired scene by pressing the multi selector H or I, and then press the k
button.
j (Night landscape): Captures the atmosphere of night landscapes.
c (Landscape): Use this mode for vivid landscapes and cityscapes.
W (Backlighting): The flash fires when there is backlight to prevent the subject from being
hidden in shadow, or use the HDR function to shoot when there are very bright areas and
very dark areas in the same frame.
C
The Basics of Shooting and Playback
A (auto) mode (A40)
Shoot easily with basic
camera operations without
going into detailed
settings.
M User settings mode
(A63)
Note on the Flash
When the flash is lowered, the flash setting is fixed at off and W is displayed at the top of the monitor.
In situations where a flash is needed, such as in dark locations or when the subject is backlit, be sure
to raise the flash (A66).
C
Features That Are Available in Shooting Mode
• The functions of the multi selector H (m), I (p), J (n) or K (o) can be set.
See “Features That Can Be Set Using the Multi Selector” (A65) for more information.
• Press the d button to display the menu for the selected shooting mode. See “Shooting
Features” (A39) for more information about the settings available in the menu for the current
shooting mode.
29
Step 3 Frame a Picture
1
Ready the camera.
• Keep your fingers, hair, strap and other objects away from the lens, flash, AF-assist
illuminator and microphone.
The Basics of Shooting and Playback
2
Frame the picture.
• Point the camera at the subject.
25m 0s
1/250
C
F5.6
840
ISO Sensitivity
E (ISO sensitivity, A8) may be displayed on the shooting screen. When E is displayed, the ISO
sensitivity is automatically raised.
C
Viewfinder
Use the viewfinder to frame pictures (A16) when bright light makes it difficult to see the display on
the monitor.
C
30
Using a Tripod
• In the following situations, use of a tripod is recommended to avoid the effects of camera shake:
- When shooting in a dark location or with the flash mode (A66) set to W (off)
- When shooting in the telephoto zoom position
• To take a picture with the camera attached to a tripod, set Vibration reduction in the setup
menu (A108) to Off.
Step 3 Frame a Picture
Using the Zoom
Zoom out
Zoom in
Digital Zoom
When the camera is already at the maximum optical zoom position, rotating the
zoom control toward g (telephoto zoom position) triggers the digital zoom.
Digital zoom can magnify the subject up to about 2× beyond the maximum
magnification of the optical zoom.
Maximum optical zoom
The Basics of Shooting and Playback
Rotate the zoom control to activate the optical zoom.
• To zoom in so that the subject fills a larger area of the
frame, rotate toward g (telephoto zoom position).
• To zoom out so that the area visible increases in the
frame, rotate toward f (wide-angle position).
• Rotating the zoom control all the way in either
direction adjusts the zoom quickly, while rotating the
control partially adjusts the zoom slowly (except
during movie recording).
• A zoom indicator is displayed at the top of the monitor
Digital
Optical
when the zoom control is rotated.
zoom
zoom
• The zoom can also be operated by rotating the side
zoom control (A3) toward g or f.
The function of the side zoom control can be set in the Assign side zoom
control in the setup menu (A108).
Digital zoom enabled
• The focus will be at the center of the frame and the focus area will not be
displayed when the digital zoom is in effect.
C
Digital Zoom and Interpolation
Unlike the optical zoom, the digital zoom uses a digital imaging process known as interpolation to
magnify images, resulting in slight deterioration of image quality depending on the image size
(A78) and digital zoom magnification.
V indicates the zoom position where interpolation is applied when shooting still pictures. When the
zoom is increased beyond the V position, interpolation is initiated and the zoom indicator also turns
yellow.
V moves to the right as the image size becomes smaller, allowing you to confirm the zoom position
that can be used to capture still images without image degradation before shooting at the current
image size setting.
When the image size is small
• Digital zoom can be disabled from the Digital zoom option in the setup menu (A108).
C
More Information
• See “Zoom memory” (A62) for more Information.
• See “Startup zoom position” (A62) for more Information.
31
Step 4 Focus and Shoot
1
Press the shutter-release button
halfway, i.e., press the button slightly
until you feel resistance.
The Basics of Shooting and Playback
• When you press the shutter-release button
halfway, the camera sets the focus and
exposure (shutter speed and aperture value).
Focus and exposure remain locked while the
shutter-release button is pressed halfway.
• When the camera detects the main subject, it focuses
on that subject. When the subject is in focus, the focus
areas (up to 12 areas) light in green.
1/250
Shutter
speed
F5.6
Aperture
value
• The camera has nine focus areas, and if it does not
detect the main subject, it automatically selects the
focus areas containing the subject closest to the
camera. When the subject is in focus, the focus areas
that are in focus (up to nine areas) light in green.
1/250
F5.6
• When the digital zoom is in effect, the camera focuses
on the subject at the center of the screen, and the focus area is not displayed. When
the subject is in focus, the focus indicator (A8) lights in green.
• When the shutter-release button is pressed halfway and the focus area or focus
indicator flashes in red, the subject is out of focus. Change the composition and press
the shutter-release button halfway again.
2
Press the shutter-release button all the way,
i.e., press the button the rest of the way down.
• The shutter is released and the picture is recorded.
• If you press the shutter-release button with too much
force, the camera may shake, causing images to be
blurred. Press the button gently.
32
Step 4 Focus and Shoot
B
Note on Recording Images and Saving Movies
The indicator showing the number of exposures remaining or the indicator showing the maximum
movie length flashes while images are being recorded or while a movie is being saved. Do not open
the battery-chamber/memory card slot cover or remove the battery or memory card while an
indicator is flashing. Doing this could result in loss of data, or in damage to the camera or the
memory card.
B
Autofocus
B
The Basics of Shooting and Playback
Autofocus may not perform as expected in the following situations. In some rare cases, the subject
may not be in focus despite the fact that the focus area or focus indicator lights in green.
• Subject is very dark
• Objects of sharply differing brightness are included in the scene (e.g. the sun behind the subject
makes that subject appear very dark)
• No contrast between the subject and surroundings (e.g. a portrait subject, wearing a white shirt, is
standing in front of a white wall)
• Several objects are at different distances from the camera (e.g., an animal inside a cage)
• Subjects with repeating patterns (window blinds, buildings with multiple rows of similarly shaped
windows, etc.)
• Subject is moving rapidly
In these situations, try pressing the shutter-release button halfway to refocus several times, or focus
on another subject and use focus lock (A86). When using focus lock, be sure that the distance
between the camera and the subject with which focus was locked is the same as that for the actual
subject.
The camera can also focus using manual focus (A72, E2).
The Subject Is Too Close to the Camera
If the camera does not focus, try shooting with p (macro close-up) (A73) in the focus mode, or
Close-up (A49) scene mode.
C
AF-assist Illuminator
In dark places, the AF-assist illuminator (A109) may light when the shutter-release button is
pressed halfway.
C
To Make Sure You Do Not Miss a Shot
If you are concerned that you might miss a shot, press the shutter-release button all the way without
first pressing it halfway.
C
More Information
See “Focusing on Subject” (A84) for more information.
33
Step 5 Play Back Images
1
Press the c (playback) button.
c (playback) button
• When you switch from shooting mode
to playback mode, the last image
saved will be displayed in full-frame
playback mode.
Multi selector
2
Use the multi selector to view previous or next images.
The Basics of Shooting and Playback
•
•
•
•
To view previous images: H or J
To view next images: I or K
Images can also be selected by rotating the multi selector.
To play back images that are saved in the internal
15/05/2012
0004.JPG
memory, remove the memory card. C is displayed in
brackets, before “Current image number/total number
of images” on the playback screen.
15:30
4/ 132
Current image number/
Total number of images
• To return to shooting mode, press the c button again, or press the shutter-release
button, or b (e movie-record) button.
C
34
Viewing Pictures
• Press the x button to switch between using the monitor and viewfinder display (A16).
• Press the s button to switch between showing and hiding the photo information or shooting
information that is displayed on the monitor (A15).
• Pictures taken using face detection (A85) or pet detection (A52) will be rotated automatically
when displayed in full-frame playback mode according to the orientation of the face.
• The orientation of an image can be changed using Rotate image in the playback menu (A88).
• When pictures taken with the continuous shooting feature are displayed, each series of images is
treated as a group, and only the group’s “key picture” is displayed (see “Sequence display options”
(A89) for more information). While the key picture of a sequence is displayed in full-frame
playback mode, press the k button to display each image in the sequence individually. To return
to key picture only display, press the multi selector H.
• Images may be displayed at low resolution immediately after switching to the previous or next
image.
Step 5 Play Back Images
Changing How Images Are Displayed
When using playback mode, you can change how images are
displayed by rotating the zoom control toward f (h)/g (i).
Playback Zoom
g
(i)
15/05/2012 15:30
0004.JPG
4/ 132
f
(h)
Image is zoomed in.
• To adjust the zoom ratio, rotate the zoom control toward f (h)/g (i) or
rotate the command dial. The zoom increases up to about 10×.
• To view a different area of the image, press the multi selector H, I, J, or K.
• Pictures taken using face detection (A85) or pet detection (A52) are
enlarged at the center of the face that was detected during shooting. If the
camera detected multiple faces when the image was captured, use H, I, J,
and K to display a different face. Change the zoom ratio and press H, I, J, or
K to zoom in on an area of the image where there are no faces.
• You can crop the image and save the displayed area of the image as a separate
file by pressing the d button (E22).
• Press the k button to return to full-frame playback mode.
The Basics of Shooting and Playback
Image is displayed in fullframe playback mode.
Display position guide
Thumbnail Playback, Calendar Display
f
(h)
15/05/2012 15:30
0004.JPG
4/ 132
Full-frame playback
mode
g
(i)
1 / 132
f
(h)
g
(i)
Image thumbnail display
(4, 9, 16 and 72 images per screen)
2012 05
1 2 3 4 5
6 7 8 9 10 11 12
13 14 15 16 17 18 19
20 21 22 23 24 25 26
27 28 29 30 31
3
Calendar display
• You can view several images on one screen, making it easy to find the image you want.
• You can change the number of images displayed by rotating the zoom control
toward f (h)/g (i).
• Rotate the multi selector or press H, I, J, or K to select an image and then
press the k button to display that image in full-frame playback mode.
• When 72 images are displayed, rotate the zoom control toward f (h) to
switch to calendar display.
• While using calendar display mode, rotate the multi selector or press H, I, J,
or K to select a date and then press the k button to display the first image
captured on that day.
35
Step 6 Delete Unwanted Images
1
Press the l button to delete the
image currently displayed on the
monitor.
2
Press the multi selector H or I to select the
desired deletion method and press the k
button.
Delete
The Basics of Shooting and Playback
• Current image: Only the current image is deleted.
Current image
If the key picture of a sequence is selected, all images in
Erase selected images
All images
the sequence are deleted.
• Erase selected images: Multiple images can be
selected and deleted. See “Operating the Erase Selected Images Screen” (A37) for
more information.
• All images: All images are deleted.
• To exit without deleting, press the d button.
3
Press H or I to select Yes and press the k
button.
• Deleted images cannot be recovered.
• To cancel, press H or I to select No and press the k
button.
B
Erase 1 image?
Yes
No
Notes on Deletion
• Deleted images cannot be recovered. Transfer important images to a computer before deleting
them.
• Protected images cannot be deleted (A88).
C
Deleting Images in a Sequence
• When images are taken with continuous shooting, each series of images is treated as a group
(pictures in a sequence) and only the group’s “key picture“ is displayed in the default setting
(E13).
• When you press the l button during key picture playback, all images in the key picture’s
sequence can be deleted (E14).
• To delete each picture in a sequence, before pressing the l button, press the k button to display
each image in the sequence individually.
C
36
Deleting the Last Image Captured While in Shooting Mode
When using shooting mode, press the l button to delete the last image that was saved.
Step 6 Delete Unwanted Images
Operating the Erase Selected Images Screen
1
Press the multi selector J or K to select an
image to be deleted, and then press H to
display y.
• To cancel the selection, press I to remove y.
• Rotate the zoom control (A31) toward g (i) to
switch back to full-frame playback or f(h) to display
thumbnails.
2
Erase selected images
Back
ON/OFF
Add y to all images that you want to delete and then press the k
button to apply the selection.
The Basics of Shooting and Playback
• A confirmation dialog is displayed. Follow the instructions displayed on the monitor.
37
38
Shooting Features
This chapter describes each of the camera’s shooting modes and the features that
are available when using shooting mode.
By referring to this information, you will learn how to select different shooting
modes and adjust settings according to the shooting conditions and the kind of
images you want to capture.
Shooting Features
Programmed auto
Shooting menu
25m 0s
1/250
F5.6
1/250
F5.6
840
Image quality
Image size
Picture Control
Custom Picture Control
White balance
Metering
Continuous
25m 0s
840
Auto
39
Shooting Features
A (Auto) Mode
Shoot easily with basic camera operations without
going into detailed settings.
The camera selects the focus area for autofocus in
accordance with the composition or subject.
• When the camera detects the main subject, it
focuses on that subject (Target finding AF).
• The camera has nine focus areas, and if it does not detect the main subject, it
automatically selects the focus areas containing the subject closest to the
camera.
See “Using the Target Finding AF” (A84) for more information.
Changing A (Auto) Mode Settings
Shooting Features
• See “Features That Can Be Set Using the Multi Selector” (A65) for more
information on flash mode (A66), self-timer (A69), smile timer (A70), focus
mode (A72) and exposure compensation (A74).
• Functions that can be set using the d button: The image quality and image
size can be set (A77).
C
40
Features That Cannot Be Used Simultaneously
This feature may not be used in combination with certain features (A80).
Scene Mode (Shooting Suited to Scenes)
When one of the following scenes is selected using the mode dial or the scene
menu, images are captured using settings that are optimized for the selected
scene.
j Night landscape (A42), c Landscape (A43),
W Backlighting (A44)
Rotate the mode dial to j, c or W and take pictures.
y (Scene)
Press the d button to display the scene menu and choose one of the following
shooting scenes.
Scene auto selector (default setting) (A45)
Portrait (A46)
Sports (A46)
Night portrait (A47)
Party/indoor (A48)
Beach (A48)
Snow (A48)
Sunset (A48)
Dusk/dawn (A48)
k
u
l
m
n
p
O
s
Close-up (A49)
Food (A50)
Museum (A50)
Fireworks show (A50)
Black and white copy (A50)
Panorama (A51)
Pet portrait (A52)
3D photography (A53)
Shooting Features
x
b
d
e
f
Z
z
h
i
Scene menu
Scene auto selector
Portrait
Sports
Night portrait
Party/indoor
Beach
Snow
C
View a Description (Help Information) of Each Scene
Select the desired scene from the scene menu and rotate the zoom control (A4) toward g (j) to
view a description (help) of that scene. To return to the original screen, rotate the zoom control
toward g (j) again.
C
More Information
See “Note on the Command Dial Operation When Menus are Displayed” (A14) for more
information.
41
Scene Mode (Shooting Suited to Scenes)
Changing Scene Mode Settings
• “Features That Can Be Set Using the Multi Selector“ (A65) vary with scene
mode. See “List of the Default Settings” (A75) for more information.
• Functions that can be set using the d button: The image quality and image
size can be set (A77).
Characteristics of Each Scene
• Use of a tripod is recommended in scene modes with O indicated. Set
Vibration reduction in the setup menu (A108) to Off when using a tripod to
stabilize the camera.
• For scene modes that use the flash, be sure to press the m (flash pop-up) button
to raise the flash before shooting (A66).
Shooting Features
j Night landscape
Use this mode to capture the atmosphere of night landscapes.
Press the d button to select Hand-held or Tripod in Night
landscape.
• Hand-held (default setting): This enables you to shoot with the minimum of camera
shake and noise even when holding the camera by hand.
- The Y icon is displayed on the shooting screen.
- When the shutter-release button is pressed all the way, pictures are shot continuously,
and the camera combines these pictures to save a single picture.
- Once the shutter-release button is pressed all the way, hold the camera steady without
moving it until a still picture is displayed. After taking a picture, do not turn the camera
off before the monitor switches to the shooting screen.
- The angle of view (image area) seen in the saved image will be narrower than that seen
on the monitor at the time of shooting.
• Tripod: Select this mode when the camera is stabilized, such as with a tripod.
- The Z icon is displayed on the shooting screen.
- Vibration reduction (A108) is automatically set to Off regardless of the applied
option in the setup menu.
- Press the shutter-release button all the way to shoot a single picture at slow shutter
speeds.
• When the shutter-release button is pressed halfway, the focus area or focus indicator
(A8) always lights in green.
42
Scene Mode (Shooting Suited to Scenes)
c Landscape
Use this mode for vivid landscapes and cityscapes.
Press the d button to select Noise reduction burst or
Single shot in Landscape.
• Noise reduction burst: This enables you to shoot a sharp landscape with a minimum of
noise.
- The x icon is displayed on the shooting screen.
- When the shutter-release button is pressed all the way, pictures are shot continuously,
and the camera combines these pictures to save a single picture.
- Once the shutter-release button is pressed all the way, hold the camera steady without
moving it until a still picture is displayed. After taking a picture, do not turn the camera
off before the monitor switches to the shooting screen.
- The angle of view (image area) seen in the saved image will be narrower than that seen
on the monitor at the time of shooting.
• When the shutter-release button is pressed halfway, the focus area or focus indicator
(A8) always lights in green.
Shooting Features
• Single shot (default setting): Records pictures with emphasized outlines and contrast.
- When the shutter-release button is pressed all the way, one frame is taken.
43
Scene Mode (Shooting Suited to Scenes)
o Backlighting
Use when light is coming from behind the subject, throwing features or details into shadow.
Press the d button to set HDR (high dynamic range) compositing using the HDR setting.
• When HDR is set to Off (default setting): The flash fires to
prevent the backlit subject from being hidden in shadow.
- Shoot pictures with the flash raised.
- The camera focuses at the center area of the frame.
- Press the shutter-release button all the way to shoot a
single picture.
Shooting Features
44
• When HDR is set to Level 1-Level 3: Use when taking
pictures with very bright and dark areas in the same frame.
Select Level 1 when there is less difference between bright
and dark areas, and Level 3 when there is more difference
between bright and dark areas.
- The P icon is displayed on the shooting screen.
- The camera focuses at the center area of the frame.
- When the shutter-release button is pressed all the way,
the camera shoots pictures continuously and saves the following two images.
- Non-HDR composite image
- HDR composite image (loss of detail is reduced in highlights and shadows)
- The second image saved is an HDR composite image. If there is only enough memory
to save one image, an image processed by D-Lighting (A88) at the time of shooting,
in which dark areas of the image are corrected, is the only image saved.
- Once the shutter-release button is pressed all the way, hold the camera steady without
moving it until a still picture is displayed. After taking a picture, do not turn the camera
off before the monitor switches to the shooting screen.
- The angle of view (i.e., the area visible in the frame) seen in the saved image will be
narrower than that seen on the monitor at the time of shooting.
- Depending on the shooting conditions, dark shadows may appear around bright
subjects and bright areas may appear around dark subjects. You can compensate by
lowering the level setting.
- Use of a tripod is recommended. Set Vibration reduction in the setup menu (A108)
to Off when using a tripod to stabilize the camera.
Scene Mode (Shooting Suited to Scenes)
y M x Scene auto selector
When you frame a picture, the camera automatically selects the optimum scene for simpler
shooting.
e/b: Portrait, f: Landscape, h/c: Night portrait, g: Night landscape, i:
Close-up, j/d: Backlighting, d: Other scenes
• When the camera automatically selects a scene mode, the shooting mode icon changes
to that for the scene mode currently enabled.
• The camera automatically selects the focus area for autofocus in accordance with the
composition. The camera detects and focuses on faces (see “Using Face Detection”
(A85) for more information).
• Depending upon shooting conditions, the camera may not select the desired scene
mode. Should this occur, switch to A (auto) mode (A28) or select the optimum scene
mode for the subject manually.
• The digital zoom is not available.
Shooting Features
C
Notes on Selecting a Scene Mode Using Scene Auto Selector and Its
Shooting Operation
• When the shooting mode icon is e or h, the camera performs the optimal operation for
shooting a close-up picture of one to two persons. When the icon is b or c, the camera
performs the optimal operation for shooting a picture of three or more persons or shooting a
composition with a large background area.
• If the camera switches to h/c (Night portrait), the flash mode is fixed at red-eye reduction and
the flash is used for capturing portraits (images are not captured continuously) just as when
Tripod is selected when using Night portrait (A47).
• If the camera switches to g (Night landscape), the camera shoots images continuously and
combines and saves them as one image, just as when Hand-held is selected when using
j (Night landscape) (A42).
• If the shooting mode icon is j, the camera performs the optimal operation for shooting nonhuman subjects. If the icon is d, the camera performs the operation using face detection that is
optimal for shooting human subjects.
45
Scene Mode (Shooting Suited to Scenes)
y M b Portrait
Use this mode for portraits.
• The camera detects and focuses on a face (see “Using Face
Detection” (A85) for more information).
• After the skin softening feature makes facial skin tones
softer, the camera records the image (A54).
• If no faces are detected, the camera focuses on the subject
at the center of the frame.
• The digital zoom is not available.
y M d Sports
Shooting Features
46
Use this mode when shooting sporting events. The camera
captures a series of still images that allow you to clearly see
detailed movements in a moving subject.
• The camera focuses at the center area of the frame.
• To capture a series of images, hold down the shutterrelease button all the way. Up to five pictures are shot at a
rate of about seven frames per second (fps) (when image quality is set to Normal and
image size is set to i 4608×3456).
• The camera focuses the subject even when the shutter-release button is not pressed
halfway. You may hear the sound of the camera focusing.
• Focus, exposure, and hue are fixed at the values determined with the first shot in each
series.
• The frame rate with continuous shooting may become slow depending upon the current
image quality setting, image size setting, memory card used, or shooting condition.
Scene Mode (Shooting Suited to Scenes)
y M e Night portrait
Use this mode for portraits taken at sunset or at night. Flash is
used to illuminate the subject while maintaining the mood of
the background.
Select Hand-held or Tripod on the screen that is displayed
when e Night portrait scene mode is selected.
• Tripod (default setting): Select this mode when the camera is stabilized, such as with a
tripod.
- The Z icon is displayed on the shooting screen.
- Vibration reduction (A108) is automatically set to Off regardless of the applied
option in the setup menu.
- Press the shutter-release button all the way to shoot a single picture at slow shutter
speeds.
• The camera detects and focuses on a face (see “Using Face Detection” (A85) for more
information).
• After the skin softening feature makes facial skin tones softer, the camera records the
image (A54).
• If no faces are detected, the camera focuses on the subject at the center of the frame.
• Shoot pictures with the flash raised.
• The digital zoom is not available.
Shooting Features
• Hand-held:
- The Y icon is displayed on the shooting screen.
- For a scene with a dark background, when the shutter-release button is pressed all the
way, pictures are shot continuously. The camera combines these pictures to save a
single picture.
- When shooting at the telephoto zoom position, the camera may not shoot pictures
continuously even if a scene has a dark background.
- Once the shutter-release button is pressed all the way, hold the camera steady without
moving it until a still picture is displayed. After taking a picture, do not turn the camera
off before the monitor switches to the shooting screen.
- If the subject moves while the camera is shooting continuously, the image may be
distorted, overlapped or blurred.
47
Scene Mode (Shooting Suited to Scenes)
y M f Party/indoor
Suitable for taking pictures in parties. Captures the effects of
candlelight and other indoor background lighting.
• The camera focuses at the center area of the frame.
• When shooting in a dark location, hold the camera steadily
to avoid the effects of camera shake. To take a picture with
the camera attached to a tripod, set Vibration reduction
in the setup menu (A108) to Off.
y M Z Beach
Captures the brightness of such subjects as beaches or sunlit
expanses of water.
• The camera focuses at the center area of the frame.
Shooting Features
y M z Snow
Captures the brightness of sunlit snow.
• The camera focuses at the center area of the frame.
y M h Sunset
O
Preserves the deep hues seen in sunsets and sunrises.
• When the shutter-release button is pressed halfway, the
focus area or focus indicator (A8) always lights in green.
y M i Dusk/dawn
O
Preserves the colors seen in the weak natural light before
sunrise or after sunset.
• When the shutter-release button is pressed halfway, the
focus area or focus indicator (A8) always lights in green.
48
Scene Mode (Shooting Suited to Scenes)
y M k Close-up
Use this mode to photograph flowers, insects, and other small
objects at close range.
Select Noise reduction burst or Single shot on the screen
that is displayed when k Close-up scene mode is selected.
• Single shot (default setting): Records pictures with emphasized outlines and contrast.
- When the shutter-release button is pressed all the way, one frame is taken.
• The focus mode (A72) setting is changed to p (macro close-up) and the camera
automatically zooms to the closest position to the subject where the camera can shoot.
• You can move the focus area that the camera focuses on. Press the k button and then
rotate the multi selector or press H, I, J, or K to move the focus area. To adjust the
following settings, press the k button to temporarily cancel focus area selection, and
then adjust each setting.
- Flash mode (when Single shot is selected)
- Self-timer
- Exposure compensation
• The camera focuses on the subject even when the shutter-release button is not pressed
halfway. You may hear the sound of the camera focusing.
Shooting Features
• Noise reduction burst: This setting enables you to shoot a sharp picture with a
minimum of noise.
- The x icon is displayed on the shooting screen.
- When the shutter-release button is pressed all the way, pictures are shot continuously,
and the camera combines these pictures to save a single picture.
- Once the shutter-release button is pressed all the way, hold the camera steady without
moving it until a still picture is displayed. After taking a picture, do not turn the camera
off before the monitor switches to the shooting screen.
- If the subject moves or there is a significant camera shake during continuous shooting,
the image may be distorted, overlapped, or blurred.
- The angle of view (image area) seen in the saved image will be narrower than that seen
on the monitor at the time of shooting.
49
Scene Mode (Shooting Suited to Scenes)
y M u Food
Shooting Features
Use this mode when taking pictures of food.
• The focus mode (A72) setting is changed to p (macro
close-up) and the camera automatically zooms to the closest
position to the subject where the camera can shoot.
• You can adjust the hue by pressing the multi selector H or
I. The hue adjustment setting is saved in the camera’s
memory even after the camera is turned off.
• You can move the focus area that the camera focuses on.
Press the k button and then rotate the multi selector or
press H, I, J, or K to move the focus area. To adjust the
following settings, press the k button to temporarily cancel
focus area selection, and then adjust each setting.
25m 0s
- Hue
- Self-timer
840
1/250 F5.6
- Exposure compensation
• The camera focuses on the subject even when the shutter-release button is not pressed
halfway. You may hear the sound of the camera focusing.
y M l Museum
Use indoors where flash photography is prohibited (for
example, in museums and art galleries) or in other settings in
which you do not want to use the flash.
• The camera focuses at the center area of the frame.
• The camera captures up to ten images while the shutterrelease button is pressed all the way, and the sharpest
image in the series is automatically selected and saved (BSS
(Best Shot Selector) (A61)).
y M m Fireworks show
O
Slow shutter speeds are used to capture the expanding burst
of light from fireworks.
• The camera focuses at infinity.
• When the shutter-release button is pressed halfway, the
focus indicator (A8) always lights in green.
y M n Black and white copy
Provides clear images of text or drawings on a white board or
in print.
• The camera focuses at the center area of the frame.
• When shooting nearby object, shoot with p (macro closeup) in the focus mode (A72).
50
Scene Mode (Shooting Suited to Scenes)
y M p Panorama
Use this mode for shooting panorama pictures.
On the screen that is displayed when p Panorama scene mode is selected, select V
Easy panorama or U Panorama assist.
Shooting Features
• Easy panorama (default setting): Shoots panorama pictures that can be played back on
the camera by moving the camera in the direction you want to create a panorama
picture.
- Shooting range can be selected from Normal (180°) (default setting) or Wide (360°).
- Press the shutter-release button all the way and release it, then move the camera
slowly in the horizontal direction. Shooting ends automatically when the selected
shooting range has been captured.
- When shooting starts, the camera focuses on the subject at the center area of the
frame.
- The zoom is fixed at the wide-angle position.
- Display the picture recorded with easy panorama in full-frame playback mode and
press the k button. The camera displays the short side of the picture filling the entire
screen and scrolls the picture automatically.
See “Taking Pictures with Easy Panorama” (E3).
• Panorama assist: Use this mode when shooting a series of pictures that can later be
joined on a computer to form a single panorama.
- Press the multi selector H, I, J or K to select the direction in which pictures are to
be joined and press the k button.
- After shooting the first picture, shoot the necessary number of pictures while
confirming the seams. To finish shooting, press the k button.
- Transfer taken pictures to a computer and use the Panorama Maker 6 software (A92,
E7) to join them in a single panorama. See “Using Panorama Assist” (E6) for more
information.
B
Note on Printing Panorama Pictures
When printing panorama pictures, a full view may not be printed depending on the printer settings.
Additionally, printing may not be available depending on the printer.
For more information, see your printer’s manual or contact a digital photo lab.
51
Scene Mode (Shooting Suited to Scenes)
Shooting Features
y M O Pet portrait
Use this mode for shooting pictures of dogs or cats.
• Select Single or Continuous on the screen that is
displayed when O Pet portrait scene mode is selected.
- Single: One picture is captured at a time.
- Continuous (default setting): When the camera focuses
on the detected face in Pet portrait auto release
(default setting) mode, three pictures are shot
continuously (frame rate with continuous shooting: approximately three frames per
second when image quality is set to Normal and image size is set to i 4608×3456).
If pet portrait auto release is not used, approximately five pictures can be shot one after
the other at the maximum rate of about three frames per second while the shutterrelease button is fully held down (when image quality is set to Normal and image size
is set to i 4608×3456).
• The camera detects and focuses on the face of a dog or cat. In the default setting, when
the subject is in focus, the shutter is released automatically (Pet portrait auto release).
• Up to five pet faces are detected simultaneously. When the camera detects more than
one face, the camera focuses on the face displayed the largest in the monitor.
• If a pet’s face is not detected, press the shutter-release button halfway to focus on the
subject at the center of the frame.
• Press the multi selector J (n) to change the pet portrait auto release settings.
- Pet portrait auto release (default setting): When the camera focuses on the
detected face, the shutter is released automatically. When Pet portrait auto release
is set, the d icon is displayed on the shooting screen.
- OFF: Press the shutter-release button to release the shutter.
• In the following situations, Pet portrait auto release is automatically switched to OFF.
- When a continuous shooting series with pet portrait auto release is repeated five times
- When remaining capacity of the internal memory or memory card is low
To continue shooting with pet portrait auto release, press the multi selector J (n) to set
again.
• The digital zoom is not available.
• Under some shooting conditions such as pet-to-camera distance, speed of moving pets,
direction in which the pets are facing, and brightness of the faces, the camera may be unable
to detect a dog or cat, or a border is displayed around something other than a dog or cat.
B
52
Viewing Pictures Taken Using Pet Detection
• During playback, the camera automatically rotates images according to the orientation of the pet's
face detected at the time of shooting (except for pictures taken with continuous shooting).
• When zooming in on an image displayed in full-frame playback mode by rotating the zoom
control toward g (i), the image is enlarged at the center of a pet's face detected during shooting
(A35) (except for pictures taken with continuous shooting).
Scene Mode (Shooting Suited to Scenes)
y M s 3D photography
B
Shooting Features
Use this mode for taking 3D pictures viewable in three dimensions on a 3D-compatible TV or
monitor. The camera takes one picture for each eye to simulate a three-dimensional image.
Pictures taken in this mode are saved with Normal as the image quality and
O 1920×1080 as the image size.
• After taking the first picture by pressing the shutter-release button, move the camera
horizontally to the right so that the subject is aligned with the guide on the monitor. The
camera takes the second picture automatically.
• The focus area that the camera focuses on can be moved to areas other than at the
center of the frame. To move the focus area, press the k button before taking the first
picture, and then rotate the multi selector or press H, I, J, or K.
To adjust the following settings, press the k button to cancel the status in which the
focus area can be selected, and then perform each setting.
- Focus mode (A (Autofocus) or p (Macro close-up))
- Exposure compensation
• The telephoto zoom position is restricted to an angle of view equivalent to that of about
135 mm lens in 35mm [135] format.
• The angle of view (i.e., the area visible in the frame) seen in the saved picture will be
narrower than that seen on the monitor at the time of shooting.
• The camera cannot record 3D movies.
• The two captured images are saved as a 3D picture (MPO file) consisting of the left and
right eye images. The first image (the left eye image) is also saved as a JPEG file. See
“Using 3D Photography” (E8) for more information.
Note on 3D Photography
The camera may be unable to take a second picture or save pictures taken, depending on a variety
of factors, for example, shooting a moving subject or a scene with low light or low contrast
conditions.
B
Viewing 3D Photography
• 3D pictures cannot be played back in 3D on the camera monitor. Only the left eye image is
displayed during playback.
• To view 3D pictures in 3D, a 3D-compatible TV or monitor is required. 3D pictures can be played
back in 3D by connecting the camera to a 3D-compatible TV or monitor using a 3D-compatible
HDMI cable (A90).
• When connecting the camera using an HDMI cable, set the following for the TV settings in the
setup menu (A108).
- HDMI: Auto (default setting) or 1080i
- HDMI 3D output: On (default setting)
• When the camera is connected using an HDMI cable for playback, it may take a while to switch the
display between 3D pictures and non-3D pictures. The images played back in 3D cannot be
enlarged.
• See the documentation included with your TV or monitor to perform settings of the TV or monitor.
B
Note on Viewing 3D Pictures
When viewing 3D pictures on a 3D-compatible TV or monitor for an extended period of time, you
may experience discomfort such as eye strain or nausea. Carefully read the documentation included
with your TV or monitor to ensure proper use.
53
Scene Mode (Shooting Suited to Scenes)
Using Skin Softening
In the following shooting modes, the camera detects up to three human faces
when the shutter is released, and processes the image to make facial skin tones
softer before saving the image.
• Scene auto selector (A45), Portrait (A46) or Night portrait (A47) in
scene mode
Skin softening can also be applied to saved images (A88).
Shooting Features
B
54
Notes on Skin Softening
• It may take more time to save images.
• Under some shooting conditions, the desired skin softening results may not be achieved, and skin
softening may be applied to areas of the image where there are no faces.
Special Effects Mode (Applying Effects When Shooting)
The effect can be applied to pictures during shooting. One of the nine special
effects is selected to shoot.
To select an effect, press the d button to display the special effects menu.
Special effects
Image quality
Image size
Special effects
• The camera focuses at the center area of the frame.
Shooting Features
Special effects
Soft
Nostalgic sepia
High-contrast monochrome
High key
Low key
Selective color
Painting
Characteristics of Each Special Effect
Option
Description
Soft (default setting)
Soften the image by adding a slight blur to the overall image.
Nostalgic sepia
Add a sepia tone and reduces the contrast to simulate the qualities
of an old photograph.
High-contrast
monochrome
Create a black-and-white photograph with a clear contrast.
High key
Give the overall image a bright tone.
Low key
Give the overall image a dark tone.
55
Special Effects Mode (Applying Effects When Shooting)
Option
Description
Shooting Features
Selective color
Create a black and white image in which only the specified color
remains.
• When Selective color is set,
select a color that you want to
retain from the slider by
rotating the multi selector or
pressing H or I. To adjust the
following settings, press the k
Save
button to temporarily cancel
1/250 F5.6
color selection, and then adjust
each setting.
Slider
- Flash mode (A66)
- Self-timer (A69)
- Focus mode (A72)
- Exposure compensation (A74)
To return to the color selection screen, press the k button again.
Painting
Create images with the ambience of paintings.
High ISO
monochrome
Create monotone (black and white) pictures by intentionally
taking pictures with high ISO sensitivity. This setting is effective
when shooting subjects in low lighting conditions.
• The pictures taken may contain noise (randomly-spaced bright
pixels, fog or lines).
Silhouette
Create a silhouette photograph of a subject with a bright
background.
B
Special Effects Mode Settings
When Movie options (A99) is set to h HS 120 fps (640×480), Soft, Nostalgic sepia or
Painting cannot be selected.
C
More Information
See “Note on the Command Dial Operation When Menus are Displayed” (A14) for more
information.
Changing Special Effects Mode Settings
• “Features That Can Be Set Using the Multi Selector“ (A65) vary with special
effects. See “List of the Default Settings” (A75) for more information.
• Functions that can be set using the d button: The image quality and image
size can be set (A77).
C
56
Features That Cannot Be Used Simultaneously
This feature may not be used in combination with certain features (A80).
j, k, l, m Modes (Setting the Exposure for Shooting)
Pictures can be shot with greater control by setting the
shooting menu (A60) items in addition to setting the
shutter speed or aperture value manually according to
shooting conditions and requirements.
• The focus area for autofocus differs depending on
the setting of AF area mode that can be selected in
the j, k, l or m tab after pressing the d button.
The camera has nine focus areas, and when AF area mode is set to Auto
(default setting), it automatically selects the focus areas containing the subject
closest to the camera. When the subject is in focus, the focus areas that are in
focus (up to nine areas) light in green.
Shooting Features
The procedure for shooting pictures at the desired brightness (exposure) by
adjusting the shutter speed or aperture value is called “determine exposure”.
The sense of dynamism and amount of background defocus in pictures to be shot
vary depending on the combinations of shutter speed and aperture value even if
the exposure is the same (A58).
Rotate the command dial or multi selector to set the shutter speed and aperture
value.
25m 0s
1/250
Command dial
Exposure mode
Multi selector
Shutter speed (A83)
F5.6
Shutter speed
840
Aperture
value
Aperture value (A58)
j
Programmed auto
(A59)
Automatically adjusted (flexible program is enabled by the
command dial).
k
Shutter-priority
auto (A59)
Adjusted by the command dial. Automatically adjusted.
l
Aperture-priority
auto (A59)
Automatically adjusted.
m Manual (A59)
Adjusted by the multi selector.
Adjusted by the command dial. Adjusted by the multi selector.
The setting method of the flexible program, shutter speed, and aperture value can
be changed using the Toggle Av/Tv selection in the setup menu (A108).
57
j, k, l, m Modes (Setting the Exposure for Shooting)
Adjusting the Shutter Speed
Faster
1/1000 s
Slower
1/30 s
Adjusting the Aperture Value
Shooting Features
Larger aperture
(Small f-number)
f/3
C
Smaller aperture
(Large f-number)
f/8.3
Aperture and Zoom
The aperture value (f-number) indicates the lens brightness. Large apertures (expressed by small
f­numbers) let more light into the camera, and small apertures (large f-numbers) let less light.
The aperture value of this camera zoom lens can be changed depending on the zoom position. The
largest aperture at the wide-angle position is f/3 and that at the telephoto zoom position is f/5.9.
C
58
M (User Setting) Mode
Even when the mode dial is set to M (User settings) mode, you can shoot in j (Programmed auto),
k (Shutter-priority auto), l (Aperture-priority auto) or m (Manual). The setting combinations (User
settings) that are frequently used for shooting can be saved in M (A64).
j, k, l, m Modes (Setting the Exposure for Shooting)
j (Programmed auto) (E10)
Use for automatic control of the exposure by the camera.
• Different combinations of shutter speed and aperture
value can be selected without changing the exposure
by rotating the command dial during shooting
25m 0s
(“flexible program”). While flexible program is in effect,
840
1/250 F5.6
a flexible program mark (A) is displayed next to the
mode indicator (j) in the upper left of the monitor.
• To cancel flexible program, rotate the command dial until the flexible program
mark (A) is no longer displayed. Selecting another shooting mode, or turning
off the camera, also cancels flexible program.
k (Shutter-priority auto) (E10)
25m 0s
1/250
F5.6
1/250
F5.6
840
l (Aperture-priority auto) (E10)
Shooting Features
Use to shoot fast moving subjects with a fast shutter
speed, or use to emphasize the movements of a
moving subject with a slow shutter speed.
• The shutter speed can be adjusted by rotating the
command dial.
Use to blur the background or bring both the
foreground and background into focus.
• The aperture value can be adjusted by rotating the
multi selector.
25m 0s
840
m (Manual) (E11)
Use to control the exposure according to shooting
requirements.
• When adjusting the aperture value or shutter speed,
the degree of deviation from the exposure value
25m 0s
measured by the camera is displayed in the exposure
1/250
F5.6
840
indicator. The degree of deviation in the exposure
indicator is displayed in EVs (–2 to +2 EV in
Exposure indicator
increments of 1/3 EV).
• The shutter speed can be adjusted by rotating the command dial and the
aperture value can be adjusted by rotating the multi selector.
59
j, k, l, m Modes (Setting the Exposure for Shooting)
Changing j, k, l, m Modes
• See “Features That Can Be Set Using the Multi Selector” (A65) for more
information on flash mode (A66), self-timer (A69)/smile timer (A70), focus
mode (A72) and exposure compensation (A74).
• See “Options Available in the Shooting Menu” (below) for more information on
functions that can be set using the d button.
Options Available in the Shooting Menu
In the j, k, l, m mode, the following option settings
can be changed.
Shooting Features
60
Shooting menu
Image quality
Image size
Picture Control
Custom Picture Control
White balance
Metering
Continuous
Select j, k, l, m mode M d button M j, k, l, m tab (A13)
Option
Description
A
Image quality
Set the image quality to be recorded (compression ratio)
(A77). The default setting of image quality is Normal.
This setting is also applied to other shooting modes
(except for shooting mode M or scene mode Easy
panorama or 3D photography).
77
Image size 1
Set the image size to be recorded (A78). The default
setting is i 4608×3456. This setting is also applied to
other shooting modes (except for shooting mode M or
scene mode Easy panorama or 3D photography).
78
Picture Control 1
(COOLPIX Picture
Control)
Change the settings for image recording according to the
shooting scene or your preferences. The default setting is
Standard.
E33
Custom Picture
Control
(COOLPIX Custom
Picture Control)
Allow you to store the customized settings based in
COOLPIX Picture Control, which can set picture editing
options for recording images according to the shooting
scene or your preferences.
E37
j, k, l, m Modes (Setting the Exposure for Shooting)
Option
Description
A
Metering 1
Select the method that the camera uses to measure the
brightness of the subject. The camera adjusts the
E40
exposure, which is a combination of shutter speed and
aperture value, based on the brightness measurement. The
default setting is Matrix.
Continuous 1
Set the mode used for taking a series of pictures.
• The default setting is Single (i.e. only one picture is
captured at a time).
• When Continuous H, Continuous L, Pre-shooting
cache, or BSS (A50) is set, the pictures are shot
continuously while the shutter-release button is fully
held down.
E41
• If Continuous H: 120 fps, Continuous H: 60 fps, or
Multi-shot 16 is set, the specified number of pictures
are shot continuously when the shutter-release button is
fully held down.
• If the Intvl timer shooting is set, the pictures are shot
continuously at the set interval of 30 s, 1 min, 5 min, or
10 min when the shutter-release button is fully held
down once.
ISO sensitivity 1
Higher ISO sensitivity allows you to take pictures of darker
subjects. Additionally, even with subjects of similar
brightness, pictures can be taken at faster shutter speeds,
and blurring caused by camera shake and subject
movement can be reduced. When ISO sensitivity is set to
Auto (default setting), the camera sets the ISO sensitivity
automatically.
• In m (manual) mode, ISO sensitivity is fixed at ISO 100 if
Auto or Fixed range auto is selected.
E45
Exposure
bracketing
The exposure (brightness) can be changed automatically
during continuous shooting. The default setting is Off.
E46
AF area mode 1
Set how the camera determines the focus area using the
autofocus to Face priority, Auto (default setting),
Manual, Center, Subject tracking or Target finding
AF.
E47
Shooting Features
White balance 1
Adjust colors in the image closer to the colors as they
appear to the eye. Although Auto (normal) (default
setting) can be used under most types of lighting, you can
apply the white balance setting suited to the sky
E38
conditions or light source to achieve better results if the
default setting results are unsatisfactory.
• The preset value for preset manual applies commonly to
j, k, l, m, M shooting modes.
61
j, k, l, m Modes (Setting the Exposure for Shooting)
Option
Shooting Features
1
2
Description
Autofocus mode
E51
Flash exp. comp.
Adjust the flash output. Use this option when the flash is
too bright or too dark. The default setting is 0.0.
E52
Noise reduction
filter
Set the strength of the noise reduction function that is
normally performed when recording the picture. The
default setting is Normal.
E52
Active D-Lighting
Prevent loss of contrast details in highlights and shadows
when shooting images. The default setting is Off.
E53
Save user settings
The current settings are stored in mode dial M (A63).
64
Reset user settings
The settings saved to mode dial M are reset.
64
Zoom memory
When the zoom control is operated when set to On, the
camera changes in steps to the focal length (equivalent to
35mm [135] format of angle of view) of the zoom lens that
is set in advance.
• Select On and press the k button to display the screen
for focal length selection. Press the k button to switch
the On [w]/Off setting, then press the multi selector K
to apply the selection.
E54
Startup zoom
position 2
When the camera is turned on, the zoom position moves
to the focal length (equivalent to 35mm [135] format of
angle of view) of the zoom lens that is set in advance. The
default setting is 24 mm.
E54
The setting menu can also be displayed by pressing the w (FUNC) button during shooting.
Select the Fn button function in the setup menu (A108), and then assign a setting menu
to be displayed when the w (FUNC) button is pressed.
This function cannot be set when using M mode.
C
More Information
See “Note on the Command Dial Operation When Menus are Displayed” (A14) for more
information.
C
62
A
When Single AF (default setting) is selected, the camera
focuses only while the shutter-release button is pressed
halfway. When Full-time AF is selected, the camera
focuses even when the shutter-release button is not
pressed halfway. You may hear the sound of the camera
focusing.
Features That Cannot Be Used Simultaneously
This feature may not be used in combination with certain features (A80).
M (User Setting Modes)
Setting combinations that are frequently used for shooting (User settings) can be
saved in M. Shooting is possible in j (Programmed auto), k (Shutter-priority
auto), l (Aperture-priority auto) or m (Manual).
Rotate the mode dial to M to retrieve the settings
saved in Save user settings.
See “Saving Settings in M Mode” (A64) for more
information.
• Frame the subject and shoot with these settings, or
change the settings as required.
• The setting combinations that are retrieved when the mode dial is rotated to M
can be changed as many times as you want in Save user settings.
General setup
• Shooting mode j, k, l or m (A57)1
• Zoom position (A31)3
• Focus mode (A72)4
• Monitor display (A16)2
• Flash mode (A66)
• Exposure compensation (A74)
Shooting Features
The following settings can be stored in M.
Shooting menu
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Image quality (A77)
Picture Control (A60)
Metering (A61)
ISO sensitivity (A61)
AF area mode (A61)6
Flash exp. comp. (A62)
Active D-Lighting (A62)
1
Choose the standard shooting mode. The current flexible program (when set to j), shutter speed
(when set to k or m) or aperture value (when set to l or m) settings will also be saved.
Register which display to use for image view, the monitor or the viewfinder. The currently used
display is saved as a monitor display setting.
The current zoom position will also be saved. Startup zoom position (A62) cannot be set.
The current focus distance will also be saved when set to E (manual focus).
The preset value for preset manual applies commonly to j, k, l, m and M shooting modes.
The current focus area position is saved when AF area mode is set to Manual.
2
3
4
5
6
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Image size (A78)
White balance (A61)5
Continuous (A61)
Exposure bracketing (A61)
Autofocus mode (A62)
Noise reduction filter (A62)
Zoom memory (A62)
63
M (User Setting Modes)
Saving Settings in M Mode
1
Rotate the mode dial to the desired exposure
mode.
• Rotate to j, k, l or m.
• Settings can be saved even if rotated to M (the default
settings of shooting mode j are saved when the
camera is first purchased).
2
Change to a frequently used combination of shooting settings.
• See A63 for more information about the saved settings.
3
Press the d button.
• The shooting menu is displayed.
Shooting Features
4
Use the multi selector to select Save user
settings, and press the k button.
• Done screen is displayed, and the current settings are
saved.
B
Shooting menu
Save user settings
Reset user settings
Zoom memory
Startup zoom position
Clock Battery
If the internal clock battery (A27) is exhausted, the settings saved in M will be reset. Writing down
any important setting is recommended.
C
Resetting for User Settings
If Reset user settings is selected, the settings that are saved in the user settings are reset as follows:
• Shooting mode: j (Programmed auto)
• Zoom position: maximum wide-angle position
• Flash mode: U (auto)
• Focus mode: A (autofocus)
• Exposure compensation: 0.0
• Shooting menu: Same as the default setting for each item
64
Features That Can Be Set Using the Multi Selector
Press the multi selector H (m), J (n), I (D), or K (o) while shooting to operate
the following functions.
n Self-timer (A69)/
Smile timer (A70)
m Flash mode (A66)
Auto
Self-timer
o Exposure
compensation (A74)
D Focus mode (A72)
0.0
Exposure compensation
Autofocus
Shooting Features
+0.3
Available Functions
Available functions differ according to the shooting mode as follows.
• See “List of the Default Settings” (A75) for more information on the default
settings in each shooting mode.
Function
A
y, j,
c, W
u
j, k, l, m, M
w
Flash mode (A66)
w
1
Self-timer (A69)
w
w
w
Smile timer (A70)
w
-
w
D
Focus mode (A72)
w
w
w
o
Exposure compensation
(A74)
w
w
w2
m
n
1
1 The setting varies with scene mode or special effects. See “List of the Default Settings”
(A75) for more information.
2 When the shooting mode is m, exposure compensation cannot be used.
65
Features That Can Be Set Using the Multi Selector
Using the Flash (Flash Modes)
You can shoot pictures with a flash by raising the flash. You can set a flash mode that
suits the shooting conditions.
1
Press the m (flash pop-up) button to raise the
flash.
• When the flash is lowered, the flash mode is fixed at W
(off).
Shooting Features
2
Press H (m flash mode) on the multi selector.
3
Use the multi selector to select the desired
mode and press the k button.
• See “Available Flash Modes” (A67) for more
information.
• If the k button is not pressed within a few seconds,
the selection will be canceled.
• When U (auto) is applied, D is only displayed for
a few seconds even if monitor indicators (A15) are
turned on.
4
Frame the subject and take a picture.
• The flash lamp indicates the status of the flash when
the shutter-release button is pressed halfway.
- On:
The flash will fire when you press the
shutter-release button all the way.
- Flashing: The flash is charging. The camera cannot
take pictures.
- Off:
The flash will not fire when a picture is
taken.
• If the battery is low, the monitor will be turned off while
the flash is charging.
66
Auto
Features That Can Be Set Using the Multi Selector
B
Lowering the Flash
When not using the flash, gently push to lower the flash until it
clicks shut.
C
Effective Range of the Flash
The flash has a range of about 0.5 to 8.0 m (1 ft 8 in. to 26 ft) for wide-angle position, and about
1.5 to 4.5 m (5 ft to 14 ft) for telephoto zoom position (when ISO sensitivity is set to Auto).
Available Flash Modes
U
Auto
V
Auto with red-eye reduction
Best choice for portraits. Reduces red-eye effect caused by flash in portraits (A68).
W
Off
Flash does not fire.
• Use of a tripod is recommended to avoid the effects of camera shake when
shooting in a dark location.
X
Shooting Features
Flash fires automatically when lighting is dim.
Fill flash
The flash fires when a picture is taken, regardless of how bright the subject is. Use to
“fill-in” (illuminate) shadows and backlit subjects.
Y
Slow sync
Fill flash is combined with a slow shutter speed. Suitable for portraits of human
subjects shot at night or under dim light. Flash illuminates main subject; slow
shutter speeds are used to capture background.
Z
Rear-curtain sync
Fill flash fires just before the shutter closes, creating the effect of a stream of light
behind moving subjects.
67
Features That Can Be Set Using the Multi Selector
C
Flash Mode Setting
• The setting varies with shooting mode. See “Available Functions” (A65) and “List of the Default
Settings” (A75) for more information.
• This feature may not be used in combination with certain features. See “Features That Cannot Be
Used Simultaneously” (A80).
• The changed flash mode setting applied in the following situations is saved in the camera’s
memory even after the camera is turned off.
- When shooting mode j, k, l or m is used
- When V (auto with red-eye reduction) is selected in A (auto) mode
C
Shooting Features
68
Auto with Red-eye Reduction
This camera uses advanced red-eye reduction (“In-Camera Red-Eye Fix”).
If the camera detects “red-eye” when a picture is taken, Nikon’s own In-Camera Red-Eye Fix
processes the image before it is recorded.
Note the following when taking pictures:
• The time required to save the picture increases slightly.
• Advanced red-eye reduction may not produce the desired results in some situations.
• In extremely rare instances, areas not subject to red-eye may be affected by advanced red-eye
reduction processing. In these cases, choose another mode and try again.
Features That Can Be Set Using the Multi Selector
Using the Self-timer
The self-timer is suitable for taking group pictures and reducing the vibration when
the shutter-release button is pressed.
When using the self-timer, use of a tripod is recommended. Set Vibration reduction
in the setup menu (A108) to Off when using a tripod to stabilize the camera.
1
Press J (n self-timer) on the multi selector.
2
Use the multi selector to select n10s (or
n2s) and press the k button.
3
Shooting Features
• n10s (ten seconds): suitable for group pictures.
• n2s (two seconds): suitable for preventing camera
shake.
Self-timer
• When the shooting mode is set to Pet portrait in
scene mode, Y (pet portrait auto release) is displayed
(A52). The self-timer n10s and n2s are not available.
• The mode selected for the self-timer is displayed.
• If the k button is not pressed within a few seconds, the selection will be canceled.
Frame the picture and press the shutter-release button halfway.
• Set the focus and exposure.
4
Press the shutter-release button all
the way.
• The self-timer starts, and the number of
seconds remaining before the shutter is
released is displayed. The self-timer lamp
flashes while the timer is counting down.
About one second before the shutter is
released, the lamp stops flashing and remains
lit.
• When the shutter is released, the self-timer
turns OFF.
• To stop the timer before a picture is taken,
press the shutter-release button again.
9
1/250
F5.6
69
Features That Can Be Set Using the Multi Selector
Smile Timer (Shooting Smiling Faces)
When this mode is selected, the camera detects smiling faces and automatically
releases the shutter even if you don’t press the shutter-release button.
• This function can be used when the shooting mode is A (auto), j, k, l, m, M,
scene mode Portrait or Night portrait.
1
Press J (n self-timer) on the multi selector.
• Change any flash mode, exposure, or shooting menu
settings before pressing the n button.
2
Use the multi selector to choose a (Smile
timer), and press the k button.
Shooting Features
• If the k button is not pressed within a few seconds,
the selection will be canceled.
Smile timer
3
Frame the picture and wait for the subject to
smile without pressing the shutter-release
button.
• When the camera detects a face, a yellow double
25m 0s
border (focus area) is displayed around that face. When
the camera has focused on that face, the double
840
1/250 F5.6
border will turn green for a moment and focus is
locked.
• Up to three faces are detected. When more than one face is detected, the face closest
to the center of the frame is framed by a double border and the others by single
borders.
• If the camera detects that the face framed by the double border is smiling, the shutter
is automatically released.
• Each time the shutter is released, automatic shooting using face detection and smile
detection is repeated.
4
Finish shooting.
• To cancel smile detection and finish shooting, return to step 1 and select OFF.
70
Features That Can Be Set Using the Multi Selector
B
Notes on Smile Timer
•
•
•
•
The digital zoom is not available.
Under some shooting conditions, faces and smiling faces may not be detected properly.
See “Using Face Detection“ (A85) for more information.
The smile timer cannot be used simultaneously with certain shooting modes. See “Available
Functions” (A65) and “List of the Default Settings” (A75) for more information.
• This feature may not be used in combination with certain features. See “Features That Cannot Be
Used Simultaneously” (A80) for more information.
C
Auto Off in Smile Timer Mode
When using the smile timer, the auto off function (A109) is activated and the camera turns off
when either of the situations indicated below persists and no other operations are performed.
• The camera does not detect any faces.
• The camera detected a face, but cannot detect a smile.
C
When the Self-timer Lamp Flashes
C
Releasing the Shutter Manually
The shutter can also be released by pressing the shutter-release button. If no faces are detected, the
camera focuses on the subject at the center of the frame.
C
Shooting Features
When the camera detects a face, the self-timer lamp flashes. The lamp quickly flashes immediately
after the shutter is released.
More Information
See “Autofocus” (A33) for more information.
71
Features That Can Be Set Using the Multi Selector
Using Focus Mode
Choose a focus mode according to the desired scene.
1
Press I (p focus mode) on the multi selector.
2
Use the multi selector to choose the desired
focus mode and press the k button.
• See “Available Focus Modes” (A73) for more
information.
• If the k button is not pressed within a few seconds,
the selection will be canceled.
Shooting Features
72
• When A (autofocus) is applied, P is only displayed
for a few seconds even if monitor indicators (A15) are
turned on.
Autofocus
Features That Can Be Set Using the Multi Selector
Available Focus Modes
Autofocus
The camera automatically adjusts the focus according to the distance to the subject.
Use when the distance from the subject to the lens is 50 cm (1 ft 8 in.) or more, or
1.5 m (5 ft) or more at the maximum telephoto zoom position.
D
Macro close-up
Use for close-ups of flowers or small objects.
How close you can be to the subject while shooting depends on the zoom position.
When the zoom position is set to a position where F and the zoom indicator light in
green, the camera can focus on subjects as close as 10 cm (4 in.).
At the wide-angle zoom position from G, the camera can focus on subjects as close
as 1 cm (0.4 in.) from the lens.
B
Infinity
Use when shooting distant scenes through window glass or when shooting landscapes.
The camera automatically adjusts the focus near infinity.
• The camera may not be able to focus on nearby objects.
• The flash mode is set to W (off).
E
Manual focus
The focus can be adjusted for any subject that is a distance of 1 cm (0.4 in.) to infinity
from the lens (E2). The closest distance at which the camera can focus varies
depending on the zoom position.
• This function can be used when the shooting mode is j, k, l, m, M, special
effects mode or scene mode Sports.
B
Shooting Features
A
Note on Shooting with the Flash
When shooting with D (macro close-up) or E (manual focus), the flash may be unable to light the
entire subject at distances of less than 50 cm (1 ft 8 in.).
C
Focus Mode Setting
• The setting varies with the shooting mode. See “Available Functions” (A65) and “List of the
Default Settings” (A75) for more information.
• This feature may not be used in combination with certain features. See “Features That Cannot Be
Used Simultaneously” (A80) for more information.
• For shooting modes j, k, l and m, the changed focus mode setting is saved in the camera’s
memory even after the camera is turned off.
C
Macro Close-up
When using j, k, l, m or M mode if Autofocus mode in the shooting menu (A60) is set to Fulltime AF, the camera will adjust focus even if the shutter-release button is not pressed halfway.
When using other shooting modes, Full-time AF is turned on automatically when macro close-up is
turned on.
You may hear the sound of the camera focusing.
73
Features That Can Be Set Using the Multi Selector
Adjusting Brightness (Exposure Compensation)
By adjusting exposure compensation when taking pictures, you can adjust overall
image brightness.
1
Press K (o exposure compensation) on the
multi selector.
2
Press the multi selector H or I to
select a compensation value.
Exposure compensation guide
• To make the image brighter, apply positive (+)
exposure compensation.
• To make the image darker, apply negative (–)
exposure compensation.
+0.3
Shooting Features
0.0
Exposure compensation
Histogram
Exposure compensation value
3
Press the k button.
• If the k button is not pressed within a few seconds, the selection is set and the
setting menu disappears.
• Even when the shutter-release button is pressed without pressing the k button, a
picture can be shot using the selected compensation value.
• When an exposure compensation value other than 0.0 is applied, the value is
displayed with the H icon on the monitor.
4
Press the shutter-release button to take a
picture.
• To turn off exposure compensation, return to step 1,
change the value to 0.0.
25m 0s
840
74
Features That Can Be Set Using the Multi Selector
C
Exposure Compensation Value
• The changed exposure compensation value applied in j, k or l mode is saved in the camera's
memory even after the camera is turned off.
• When the shooting mode is the Fireworks show scene mode (A50) or m (Manual) (A59), the
exposure compensation cannot be used.
C
Using the Histogram
A histogram is a graph showing the distribution of tones in the image. Use as a guide when using
exposure compensation and shooting without the flash.
• The horizontal axis corresponds to pixel brightness, with dark tones to the left and bright tones to
the right. The vertical axis shows the number of pixels.
• Increasing exposure compensation shifts tone distribution to the right, and decreasing it shifts
tone distribution to the left.
List of the Default Settings
Shooting mode
1
2
3
Flash mode1
(A66)
Self-timer
(A69)
Focus mode
(A72)
Exposure
compensation
(A74)
A
(auto)
(A40)
U
OFF
A2
0.0
u
(special effects)
(A55)
W3
OFF
A
0.0
j, k, l, m
(A57)
U
OFF
A
0.0
M
(User settings)
(A63)
U
OFF
A
0.0
Shooting Features
The default settings in each shooting mode are described below.
• Similar information about scene mode can be found on the next page.
When the flash is lowered, the flash mode is fixed at W (off).
A (autofocus), p (macro close-up) or B (infinity) can be selected.
The flash is fixed at W (off) when in High ISO monochrome or Silhouette.
• The setting applied in shooting modes j, k, l or m is saved in the camera’s
memory even after the camera is turned off (except for self-timer).
C
Features That Cannot Be Used Simultaneously
This feature may not be used in combination with certain features (A80).
75
Features That Can Be Set Using the Multi Selector
The default settings in scene mode are described below.
Flash mode
(A66)
Shooting Features
1
2
Self-timer
(A69)
Focus mode
(A72)
Exposure
compensation
(A74)
j (A42)
W1
OFF
B1
0.0
c (A43)
W1
OFF
B1
0.0
W (A44)
X/W2
OFF
A1
0.0
x (A45)
U3
OFF
A1
0.0
b (A46)
V
OFF4
A1
0.0
d (A46)
W1
OFF1
A5
0.0
e (A47)
V6
OFF4
A1
0.0
f (A48)
V7
OFF
A1
0.0
Z (A48)
U
OFF
A8
0.0
z (A48)
U
OFF
A8
0.0
h (A48)
W1
OFF
B1
0.0
i (A48)
W1
OFF
B1
0.0
k (A49)
W9
OFF
p1
0.0
u (A50)
W1
OFF
p1
0.0
l (A50)
W1
OFF
A8
0.0
m (A50)
W1
OFF1
B1
0.01
0.0
n (A50)
W
OFF
A8
p (A51)
W10
OFF10
A11
0.0
O (A52)
W1
Y12
A8
0.0
s (A53)
W1
OFF1
A8
0.0
The setting cannot be changed.
Flash is fixed at X (fill flash) when HDR is set to Off, and is fixed at W (off) when HDR is set
to other than Off.
3 U (auto) or W (off) can be selected. When U (auto) is selected, the camera
automatically selects the flash mode appropriate for the scene it has selected.
4 Self-timer or smile timer can be set.
5 A (autofocus) or E (manual focus) can be selected.
6 The setting cannot be changed. Fill flash fires for red-eye reduction.
7 May switch to slow sync with red-eye reduction flash mode.
8 A (autofocus) or D (macro close-up) can be selected.
9
Flash is fixed at W (off) when using Noise reduction burst.
10 The setting cannot be changed when using Easy panorama.
11 The setting cannot be changed when using Easy panorama. A (autofocus), D (macro
close-up) or B (infinity) can be selected when using Panorama assist.
12 The self-timer is not available. Pet portrait auto release (A52) can be set to on or off.
76
Changing the Image Quality and Image Size
The image quality (compression ratio) and image size can be selected for
recording.
Available Image Quality
Display the shooting screen M d button (A13) M Shooting menu M Image quality
Lower compression ratios result in higher quality pictures, but also larger file sizes,
limiting the number of pictures that can be recorded.
Option
C
Shooting Features
Description
Finer image quality than Normal, suitable for enlargement or
a Fine
high-quality prints.
Compression ratio of about 1:4
Normal (default Normal image quality, suitable for most applications.
b setting)
Compression ratio of about 1:8
Basic image quality is lower than with Normal, suitable for
pictures attached to e-mails or used on web pages.
c Basic
Compression ratio of about 1:16
Image Quality Setting
• The setting for image quality is shown by an icon displayed on the monitor during shooting and
playback (A8 to 10).
• The image quality can be changed by selecting Image quality and rotating the command dial
when menus are displayed.
• The setting is also applied to other shooting modes (except for shooting mode M or scene mode
Easy panorama or 3D photography).
• This feature may not be used in combination with certain features. See “Features That Cannot Be
Used Simultaneously” (A80) for more information.
C
More Information
• See “Number of Exposures Remaining” (A79) for more information.
• See “File and Folder Names” (E98) for more information.
77
Changing the Image Quality and Image Size
Available Image Size
Display the shooting screen M d button (A13) M Shooting menu M Image size
You can set the image size (amount of pixels) for pictures recorded.
The larger the image, the larger the size at which it can be printed or displayed
without becoming noticeably “grainy,” limiting the number of pictures that can be
recorded.
Conversely, small image sizes are suitable for pictures attached to e-mails or used
on web pages. However, printing small images in large print sizes results in the
image turning “grainy.”
Options*
Description
Shooting Features
i
4608×3456
(default setting)
Record pictures with finer detail than those shot at E 3264×2448
or L 2272×1704.
E
3264×2448
L
2272×1704
Good balance between file size and quality; suitable in most
situations.
B
1600×1200
Smaller than i 4608×3456, E 3264×2448 and
L 2272×1704; for recording more pictures.
f
640×480
Record pictures suitable for display on a television with a screen
aspect ratio of 4:3, or for e-mail attachment.
j
4608×2592
O
1920×1080
I
4608×3072
Record pictures with the same aspect ratio (3:2) as those shot with
35mm [135] format film cameras.
H
3456×3456
Record square pictures.
Record pictures with the same aspect ratio (16:9) as wide screen TV.
* The total number of pixels captured, and the number of pixels captured horizontally and
vertically.
Example: i 4608 × 3456 = 16 megapixels, 4608 × 3456 pixels
C
78
Image Size Setting
• The setting for the image size is shown by an icon displayed on the monitor during shooting and
playback (A8 to 10).
• The image size can be changed by selecting Image size and rotating the command dial when
menus are displayed.
• The setting is also applied to other shooting modes (except for shooting mode M or scene mode
Easy panorama or 3D photography).
• This feature may not be used in combination with certain features. See “Features That Cannot Be
Used Simultaneously” (A80) for more information.
Changing the Image Quality and Image Size
C
Number of Exposures Remaining
The following table lists the approximate number of pictures that can be stored in the internal
memory and on a 4 GB memory card, at each combination of Image size (A78) and Image
quality (A77) settings. Note that the number of exposures that can be stored differs depending
on the composition of the image (due to JPEG compression). In addition, this number may differ
depending on the make of memory card, even if the capacity of the memory card is the same.
Image size
4608×3456
i (default
setting)
E 3264×2448
L 2272×1704
f 640×480
j 4608×2592
O 1920×1080
I 4608×3072
H 3456×3456
Internal memory
(90 MB)
11
19
35
22
39
68
44
79
135
87
149
247
517
812
1,137
14
26
46
81
142
237
12
22
39
14
26
46
Print size2
Memory card1
(cm/in.)
(4 GB)
470
840 39 × 29/15 × 11.5
1,480
930
1,650
28 × 21/11 × 8
2,870
1,880
3,350 19 × 14/7.5 × 5.6
5,740
3,650
6,350
13 × 10/5.3 × 4
10,000
20,100
30,100
5 × 4/2 × 1.5
40,200
620
1,120 39 × 22/15 × 8.5
1,970
3,440
6,030
16 × 9/6 × 3.5
10,000
530
950 39 × 26/15 × 10
1,670
620
1,120 29 × 29/11.5 × 11.5
1,970
Shooting Features
B 1600×1200
Image
quality
Fine
Normal
Basic
Fine
Normal
Basic
Fine
Normal
Basic
Fine
Normal
Basic
Fine
Normal
Basic
Fine
Normal
Basic
Fine
Normal
Basic
Fine
Normal
Basic
Fine
Normal
Basic
1 If the number of exposures remaining is 10,000 or more, “9999” is displayed.
2 The print size at an output resolution of 300 dpi.
Print sizes are calculated by dividing the number of pixels by the printer resolution (dpi) and
multiplying by 2.54 cm (1 in.). However, even with the same image size setting, images printed at
higher resolutions print smaller than the size indicated, and those printed at lower resolutions print
larger than the size indicated.
C
Printing Images of Size 1:1
Change the printer setting to “Border” when printing images with the size set to 1:1.
The images may not be printed in 1:1 ratio depending on the printer.
See the instruction manual of the printer or check with the authorized print dealer for further details.
79
Features That Cannot Be Used Simultaneously
Some shooting settings cannot be used in combination with other functions.
Restricted function
Flash mode
Description
When B (infinity) is selected for shooting, the flash
is not available.
Continuous
(A61)
When Continuous H, Continuous L, Preshooting cache, Continuous H: 120 fps,
Continuous H: 60 fps, BSS or Multi-shot 16 is
selected for shooting, the flash is not available.
Shooting Features
Exposure
bracketing
(A61)
The flash is not available.
Self-timer/Smile
timer
AF area mode
(A61)
When Subject tracking is selected for shooting,
the self-timer/smile timer are not available.
Focus mode
AF area mode
(A61)
When Subject tracking is selected, E (manual
focus) is not available.
Image quality
Continuous
(A61)
When Pre-shooting cache or Multi-shot 16 is
selected for shooting, Image quality is fixed at
Normal.
Continuous
(A61)
• When Multi-shot 16 is selected for shooting,
Image size is fixed at D (2560×1920 pixels).
• When Pre-shooting cache is selected for
shooting, Image size is fixed at C (2048×1536
pixels).
• When Continuous H: 120 fps is selected for
shooting, Image size is fixed at f (640×480
pixels) and when Continuous H: 60 fps is
selected, Image size is fixed at A (1280×960
pixels).
Continuous
(A61)
When Pre-shooting cache, Continuous H: 120
fps, Continuous H: 60 fps or Multi-shot 16 is
selected for shooting, ISO sensitivity is fixed at
Auto.
Image size
ISO sensitivity
80
Setting
Focus mode
(A72)
• When ISO sensitivity is set to Auto and Active
D-Lighting is set to any mode other than Off,
the maximum value for ISO sensitivity is set to
Active D-Lighting
ISO 800.
(A62)
• When Active D-Lighting is set to any mode
other than Off for shooting, 1600, 3200 or Hi 1
in ISO sensitivity is not available.
Features That Cannot Be Used Simultaneously
Restricted function
Setting
Description
White balance
Picture Control
(A60)
Picture Control
When using Active D-Lighting for shooting,
Active D-Lighting
Contrast in manual adjustment cannot be
(A62)
adjusted.
Metering
Active D-Lighting Metering is reset to Matrix when Active D(A62)
Lighting is set to any mode other than Off.
Continuous/
Exposure
bracketing
Continuous
(A61)/Exposure
bracketing
(A61)
Continuous or Exposure bracketing and selftimer/smile timer are not available simultaneously.
Picture Control
(A60)
Exposure bracketing cannot be used when
Monochrome is selected for shooting.
Smile timer
(A70)
The camera takes a picture using face detection
regardless of the applied AF area mode option.
Focus mode
(A72)
• When a setting other than Subject tracking is
selected and B (infinity) is selected as the focus
mode for shooting, the camera focuses at infinity
regardless of the applied AF area mode option.
• When set to E (manual focus), the AF area
mode cannot be set.
Picture Control
(A60)
When Target finding AF is selected and Picture
Control is set to Monochrome, AF area mode
operates using the Auto setting.
White balance
(A61)
When Target finding AF is selected and White
balance is set to Preset manual, Incandescent
or 1 in Fluorescent, AF area mode operates using
the Auto setting.
Smile timer
(A70)
Autofocus mode option cannot be changed when
shooting with the smile timer.
Focus mode
(A72)
When the focus mode is set to B (Infinity), the
focus mode operates using the Single AF setting.
AF area mode
(A61)
When AF area mode is set to Face priority, AF
area mode operates using the Single AF setting.
ISO sensitivity
(A61)
When ISO sensitivity is set to 1600, 3200 or Hi 1,
Active D-Lighting is not available.
Shooting Features
Active DLighting
Continuous and Exposure bracketing are not
available simultaneously.
Exposure bracketing is reset to Off when
Continuous is set to any mode other than Single.
The setting for Continuous is reset to Single
when Exposure bracketing is set to any mode
other than Off.
Self-timer
(A69)/Smile
timer (A70)
AF area mode
Autofocus mode
When Monochrome is selected for shooting,
White balance is fixed at Auto (normal).
81
Features That Cannot Be Used Simultaneously
Restricted function
Print date
Setting
Continuous
(A61)
Continuous
(A61)
Shutter sound is disabled when Continuous H,
Continuous L, Pre-shooting cache, Continuous
H: 120 fps, Continuous H: 60 fps, BSS, or Multishot 16 is selected in the shooting menu.
Sound settings
Blink warning
Shooting Features
Digital zoom
B
82
Description
When Pre-shooting cache, Continuous H: 120
fps or Continuous H: 60 fps is selected for
shooting, print date is not available.
Exposure
bracketing
(A61)
Shutter sound is disabled.
Smile timer
(A70)/
Continuous
(A61)/Exposure
bracketing
(A61)
Blink warning does not take effect when using the
smile timer, Continuous is set to a setting other
than Single, or exposure bracketing is set.
Smile timer
(A70)
The digital zoom cannot be used when shooting
with the smile timer.
Focus mode
(A72)
The digital zoom cannot be used when E
(manual focus) is selected.
Continuous
(A61)
The digital zoom cannot be used when Multi-shot
16 is selected for shooting.
AF area mode
(A61)
The digital zoom cannot be used when shooting
with Subject tracking.
Zoom memory
(A62)
The digital zoom cannot be used when Zoom
memory is set to On.
Notes on Digital Zoom
• The digital zoom cannot be used with certain shooting modes.
• When the digital zoom is in effect, selectable options for AF area mode or metering mode are
restricted (E82).
Features That Cannot Be Used Simultaneously
The Control Range of the Shutter Speed (j, k, l, m Modes)
The control range of the shutter speed differs depending on the aperture value or
the ISO sensitivity setting. Additionally, the control range changes in the following
continuous shooting settings.
Setting
1/40003 to 1 s (j, k, l mode)
1/40003 to 8 s (m mode)
ISO 100
1/40003 to 4 s (j, k, l mode)
1/40003 to 8 s (m mode)
ISO sensitivity (A61)1 ISO 200, 400
1
2
3
1/40003 to 4 s
ISO 800
1/40003 to 2 s
ISO 1600
1/40003 to 1 s
ISO 3200, Hi 1
1/40003 to 1/2 s
Continuous H,
Continuous L, BSS
1/40003 to 1/30 s
Pre-shooting cache,
Multi-shot 16
1/4000 to 1/30 s
Continuous H: 120 fps
1/4000 to 1/125 s
Continuous H: 60 fps
1/4000 to 1/60 s
Shooting Features
Continuous (A61)
Control range
Auto2,
Fixed range auto2
The ISO sensitivity setting is restricted depending on the continuous shooting setting (A80).
In m mode, the ISO sensitivity is fixed at ISO 100.
The maximum shutter speed value varies depending on the aperture value. The shutter
speed becomes slower when the aperture value is smaller. When the aperture value is set
to f/3 (largest aperture), the shutter speed can be set to maximum 1/2000 second. When
the value is set to f/8.3, the shutter speed can be set to maximum 1/4000 second.
83
Focusing on Subject
The focus area or focus range for adjusting focus varies depending on the
shooting mode and focus mode (A72).
• In j, k, l, m or M mode, an area can be set to adjust focus by selecting AF
area mode (A61) in the shooting menu.
• The camera may be unable to focus on the subjects for which autofocus does
not perform as expected (A33). If the camera does not focus, try pressing the
shutter-release button halfway several times or try focus lock (A86) or manual
focus (E2).
Using the Target Finding AF
Shooting Features
When AF area mode in A (auto) mode or j, k, l, m or M mode is set to
Target finding AF, the camera will adjust the focus during the following
operations if you press the shutter-release button halfway.
• When the camera detects the main subject, it
focuses on that subject. When the subject is in focus,
the focus areas (up to twelve areas) that match up
with the size of the subject will light in green.
When detecting a human face, the camera focuses
on it as a priority.
1/250 F5.6
Focus area
• The camera has nine focus areas, and if it does not
detect the main subject, it automatically selects the
focus areas containing the subject closest to the
camera. When the subject is in focus, the focus areas
that are in focus (up to nine areas) light in green.
25m 0s
1/250
F5.6
840
Focus area
B
84
Notes on Target Finding AF
• Depending on shooting conditions, the subject that the camera determines to be the main
subject may vary.
• The camera may not detect the main subject appropriately in the following situations:
- When the image shown on the monitor is very dark or bright
- When the main subject lacks clearly defined colors
- When the shot is framed so that the main subject is on the edge of the monitor
- When the main subject is composed of a repeating pattern
• The camera has nine focus areas, and in the following situations, it automatically selects the focus
areas containing the subject closest to the camera:
- When White balance is set to Preset manual, Incandescent or 1 in Fluorescent
- When Picture Control is set to Monochrome
Focusing on Subject
Using Face Detection
In the following shooting modes, the camera uses face
detection to automatically focus on human faces. If the
camera detects more than one face, a double border is
displayed around the face that the camera will focus
on, and single borders are displayed around the other
faces.
Shooting mode
Face priority is selected for AF
area mode (A61) in j, k, l,
m or M mode.
Scene auto selector, Portrait,
Night portrait scene mode
(A41)
F5.6
840
Focus area (double border)
Up to 12 The face closest to the camera
Up to 3
The face closest to the center of
the frame
• When using Face priority, if you press the shutter-release button halfway while no faces are
detected or while framing a shot with no faces in it, the camera automatically selects the focus
areas (up to nine) that contain the subject closest to the camera.
• When Scene auto selector is selected, the focus area changes depending on which scene the
camera selects.
• If no faces are detected when the shutter-release button is pressed halfway in Portrait or Night
portrait scene mode, the camera will focus on the subject at the center of the frame.
• When a (smile timer) is selected, if you press the shutter-release button halfway while no faces
are detected, the camera will focus on the subject at the center of the frame.
B
Notes on Face Detection
C
Viewing Pictures Taken Using Face Detection
Shooting Features
a (Smile timer) (A70)
Number of faces that
can be detected
25m 0s
1/250
• The camera’s ability to detect faces depends on a variety of factors, including whether or not the
subject is facing the camera. Additionally, the camera may be unable to detect faces in the
following situations:
- When faces are partially hidden by sunglasses or otherwise obstructed
- When faces take up too much or too little of the frame
• When the frame includes more than one face, the faces detected by the camera and the face on
which the camera focuses depend upon a variety of factors, including the direction in which the
subject is facing.
• In some rare cases, such as those described in “Autofocus” (A33), the subject may not be in focus
even though the double border turns green. If the camera does not focus, try “Focus Lock” (A86).
• During playback, the camera automatically rotates images according to the orientation of the
faces that were detected at the time of shooting (except for pictures taken using Continuous
(A61) or Exposure bracketing (A61)).
• When zooming in on an image displayed in full-frame playback mode by rotating the zoom
control toward g (i), the image is enlarged at the center of the face that was detected during
shooting (A35) (except for pictures taken using Continuous (A61) or Exposure bracketing
(A61)).
85
Focusing on Subject
Focus Lock
Use focus lock to focus on off-center subjects when center is selected for AF area
mode.
To focus on off-center subjects when AF area mode (A61) is set to Center in j,
k, l, m or M mode, use focus lock as described below.
1
Position the subject at the center of the
frame.
25m 0s
2
Shooting Features
1/250
F5.6
1/25 0
1/250
F5.6
1/250
F5.6
Press the shutter-release button
halfway.
• Subject is in focus and the focus area lights in
green.
• Exposure is also locked.
3
Continue holding down the shutterrelease button halfway and recompose the
picture.
• Be sure to maintain the same distance between the
camera and the subject.
4
86
Press the shutter-release button all the way to
take the picture.
840
Playback Features
This chapter describes the features available when playing back images.
Playback menu
15/05/2012 15:30
0004.JPG
4/ 132
Playback Features
Quick retouch
D-Lighting
Skin softening
Filter effects
Print order
Slide show
Protect
87
Playback Features
Features Available in Playback Mode (Playback Menu)
When viewing images in full-frame playback mode or
thumbnail playback mode, you can configure the
following functions by pressing the d button to
display the menu, and then selecting the c tab
(A13).
Option
Playback Features
88
Playback menu
Quick retouch
D-Lighting
Skin softening
Filter effects
Print order
Slide show
Protect
Description
A
k Quick retouch1, 2, 3
Create retouched copies in which contrast and
saturation have been enhanced.
E17
I D-Lighting1, 3
Create copies with enhanced brightness and contrast,
brightening dark portions of an image.
E17
e Skin softening1, 2, 3
When this feature is enabled, the camera detects faces
in pictures taken and creates a copy with softer facial
skin tones.
E18
p Filter effects1, 3
Apply a variety of effects using digital filter. The
available effects are Selective color, Cross screen,
Fisheye, Miniature effect and Painting.
E19
When using a printer to print images saved on the
memory card, the print order function can be used to
select which images are printed, and how many copies
of each image are printed.
E55
b Slide show
Images saved in the internal memory or on a memory
card are played back in an automatic slide show.
E57
d Protect
Protect selected images and movies from accidental
deletion.
E58
f Rotate image3, 4
Specify the orientation in which saved images are
displayed in playback mode.
E60
g Small picture1, 3
Create a small copy of the picture taken. This feature is
useful for creating copies for display on Web pages or
e­mail attachments.
E20
E Voice memo3, 5
Use the camera’s microphone to record voice memos
and attach them to the picture taken. Playback and
deletion of voice memos can also be performed.
E61
h Copy
Copy images between the internal memory and a
memory card. This function can also be used to copy
movies.
E62
j Black border1, 3
Create a new picture surrounded by a black border.
E21
a Print order
4
Features Available in Playback Mode (Playback Menu)
Option
1
2
3
4
A
C Sequence display
options
x Choose key picture
Change the key picture for the series of pictures that
were shot continuously (Pictures in a sequence, E13).
E63
• When changing this setting, select the desired
sequence before displaying the menu.
E63
This function is used to edit the currently selected image and save it as a separate file from
the original file.
Note, however, that the following pictures cannot be edited.
• Pictures taken using an aspect ratio of 16:9, 3:2, or 1:1 (except when using the black
border editing function)
• Pictures taken using Easy panorama or 3D photography
Note also that there is a restriction on retouching edited images (E15, E16).
Picture that has been extracted from a movie cannot be edited.
This function cannot be used for pictures in the sequence when only the key picture is
displayed. To use this function, press the k button to display individual images before
displaying the menu.
The function cannot be applied to pictures taken in scene mode 3D photography.
A voice memo cannot be attached to a picture that was shot using Easy panorama.
See “Editing Still Images” (E15) and “The Playback Menu” (E55) in the
Reference Section for more information about each function.
Playback Features
5
Description
Display a sequence of images shot continuously as
individual images, or display only the key picture of a
sequence.
89
Connecting the Camera to a TV, Computer, or Printer
You can enhance your enjoyment of images and movies by connecting the
camera to a TV, computer, or printer.
• Before connecting the camera to an external device, make sure the remaining
battery level is sufficient and turn the camera off. For information about the
connection methods and subsequent operations, refer to the documentation
included with the device in addition to this document.
USB/audio/video output connector
HDMI mini connector (Type C)
How to open the connector cover
Viewing images on a TV
Insert the plug straight.
E23
Playback Features
You can view the camera’s images and movies on a TV.
Connection method: Connect the video and audio plugs of the included
Audio Video Cable EG-CP16 to the TV’s input jacks. Alternatively,
connect a commercially available HDMI cable (Type C) to the TV’s HDMI
input jack.
Viewing and organizing images on a computer
A91
If you transfer images to a computer, you can perform simple
retouching and manage image data in addition to playing back images
and movies.
Connection method: Connect the camera to the computer’s USB input
jack with the included USB Cable UC-E6.
• Before connecting to a computer, install ViewNX 2 on the computer
using the included ViewNX 2 Installer CD. See A93 for more
information about using the ViewNX 2 Installer CD and transferring
images to a computer.
• If any USB devices that draw the power from the computer are
connected, disconnect them from the computer before you connect
the camera to it. Connecting the camera and other USB-powered
devices to the same computer simultaneously may cause a camera
malfunction or excessive power supply from the computer, which
could damage the camera or memory card.
Printing images without using a computer
E25
If you connect the camera to a PictBridge-compatible printer, you can
print images without using a computer.
Connection method: Connect the camera directly to the printer’s USB
input jack with the included USB Cable UC-E6.
90
Using ViewNX 2
ViewNX 2 is an all-in-one software package which enables you to transfer, view,
edit and share images.
Install ViewNX 2 using the ViewNX 2 Installer CD.
Your Imaging Toolbox
ViewNX 2™
Installing ViewNX 2
• An Internet connection is required.
Windows
• Windows 7 Home Basic/Home Premium/Professional/Enterprise/Ultimate
(Service Pack 1)
• Windows Vista Home Basic/Home Premium/Business/Enterprise/Ultimate
(Service Pack 2)
• Windows XP Home Edition/Professional (Service Pack 3)
Playback Features
Compatible Operating Systems
Macintosh
• Mac OS X (version 10.5.8, 10.6.8, 10.7.2)
Refer to the Nikon website for the latest information on operating system
compatibility.
1
Start the computer and insert the ViewNX 2 Installer CD into the CDROM drive.
• Mac OS: When the ViewNX 2 window is displayed, double-click the Welcome icon.
91
Using ViewNX 2
2
Select a language in the language selection dialog to open the
installation window.
• If the desired language is not available, click Region Selection to choose a different
region and then choose the desired language (the Region Selection button is not
available in the European release).
• Click Next to display the installation window.
3
Start the installer.
• We recommend clicking Installation Guide in the installation window to check the
installation help information and system requirements before installing ViewNX 2.
• Click Typical Installation (Recommended) in the installation window.
Playback Features
4
Download the software.
• When the Software Download screen is displayed, click I agree. Begin download.
• Follow the on-screen instructions to install the software.
5
Exit the installer when the installation completion screen is displayed.
• Windows: Click Yes.
• Mac OS: Click OK.
The following software is installed:
• ViewNX 2 (consisting of the three modules below)
- Nikon Transfer 2: For transferring images to the computer
- ViewNX 2: For viewing, editing, and printing transferred images
- Nikon Movie Editor: For basic editing of transferred movies
• Panorama Maker 6 (for creating a single panorama photo using a series of images shot
in panorama assist scene mode)
6
92
Remove the ViewNX 2 Installer CD from the CD-ROM drive.
Using ViewNX 2
Transferring Images to the Computer
1
Choose how images will be copied to the computer.
Choose one of the following methods:
• Direct USB connection: Turn the camera off and ensure that the memory card is
inserted in the camera. Connect the camera to the computer using the included USB
Cable UC-E6. The camera automatically turns on.
To transfer images that are saved in the camera’s internal memory, remove the
memory card from the camera before connecting it to the computer.
Playback Features
• SD card slot: If your computer is equipped with an SD card slot, the card can be
inserted directly in the slot.
• SD card reader: Connect a card reader (available separately from third-party
suppliers) to the computer and insert the memory card.
If a message is displayed prompting you to choose a program, select Nikon Transfer 2.
• When using Windows 7
If the dialog shown at right is displayed,
follow the steps below to select Nikon
Transfer 2.
1 Under Import pictures and videos,
click Change program. A program
selection dialog will be displayed; select
Import File using Nikon Transfer 2 and click OK.
2 Double-click Import File.
P510
P510
P510
If the memory card contains a large number of images, it may take a while for Nikon
Transfer 2 to start. Wait until Nikon Transfer 2 starts.
B
Connecting the USB Cable
The connection may not be recognized if the camera is connected to the computer via a USB hub.
93
Using ViewNX 2
2
Transfer images to the computer.
• Confirm that the name of the connected camera or removable disk is displayed as the
“Source” on the “Options” title bar of Nikon Transfer 2 (1).
• Click Start Transfer (2).
1
P510
2
• At default settings, all the images on the memory card will be copied to the
computer.
3
Terminate the connection.
Playback Features
• If the camera is connected to the computer, turn the camera off and then disconnect
the USB cable.
• If you are using a card reader or card slot, choose the appropriate option in the
computer operating system to eject the removable disk corresponding to the
memory card and then remove the card from the card reader or card slot.
Viewing Images
Start ViewNX 2.
• Images are displayed in ViewNX 2 when
transfer is complete.
• Consult online help for more information on
using ViewNX 2.
C
94
Starting ViewNX 2 Manually
• Windows: Double-click the ViewNX 2 shortcut on the desktop.
• Mac OS: Click the ViewNX 2 icon in the Dock.
Recording and Playing Back
Movies
You can record movies by simply pressing the b (D movie-record) button.
25m 0s
1/125
F5.6
840
7m23s
In playback mode, press the k button to play a movie.
10m16s
7m42s
Recording and Playing Back Movies
15/05/2012 15:30
0004.MOV
95
Recording and Playing Back Movies
Recording Movies
You can record movies by simply pressing the b (e movie-record) button.
Color tones, white balance, and other settings are the same as they are when
taking still images.
1
Turn on the camera and display the shooting
screen.
• The movie options icon indicates the type of movie
recorded. The default setting is d HD 1080pP
(1920×1080) (A99).
• When recording movies, the angle of view (i.e., the area
visible in the frame) is narrower than that of still
pictures. Press the s (display) button and display
the movie frame (A15) to check the range of a movie
in a frame before recording.
* The maximum movie length shown in the
illustration differs from the actual value.
2
25m 0s
1/250
F5.6
840
Maximum movie length*
Press the b (e movie-record) button
to start movie recording.
• The camera focuses on the subject at the
center of the frame. Focus areas are not
displayed during recording.
• When the multi selector K is pressed during
movie recording, the exposure is locked. To unlock, press K again.
Recording and Playing Back Movies
96
Movie option
• When recording with the movie options of the aspect
ratio of 16:9 (e.g., Movie options is d HD 1080pP
(1920×1080)), monitor display changes to an aspect
ratio of 16:9 (the movie is recorded in the range shown
in the screen on the right).
• The approximate remaining movie length is displayed
7m23s
on the monitor. C is displayed while saving to the
internal memory.
• Recording stops automatically when the maximum movie length has been recorded.
3
Press the b (e movie-record) button again to end recording.
B
Note on Recording Images and Saving Movies
The indicator showing the number of exposures remaining or the indicator showing the maximum
movie length flashes while images are being recorded or while a movie is being saved. Do not open
the battery-chamber/memory card slot cover or remove the battery or memory card while an
indicator is flashing. Doing this could result in loss of data, or in damage to the camera or the
memory card.
Recording Movies
B
Notes on Movie Recording
• When saving a movie onto a memory card, a memory card with an SD speed class of Class 6 or
higher is recommended (A23). If the transfer speed of the card is slow, the movie recording may
end unexpectedly.
• Using the digital zoom causes image quality to deteriorate. If you start recording the movie
without using digital zoom, and you keep rotating the zoom control toward g, the zoom stops at
the maximum optical zoom ratio. Release the zoom control and rotate it again toward g to trigger
digital zoom. When recording ends, digital zoom turns off.
• The sounds of zoom control operation, zoom, autofocus, vibration reduction or aperture control
when the brightness changes may be recorded.
• The following phenomena may be seen on the monitor while recording movies. These
phenomena are saved in the recorded movies.
- Banding may occur in images under fluorescent, mercury-vapor, or sodium-vapor lighting
- Subjects that move quickly from one side of the frame to the other, such as a moving train or
car, may appear skewed
- The entire movie image may be skewed when the camera is panned
- Lighting or other bright areas may leave residual images when the camera is moved
B
Notes on the Camera Temperature
C
Focusing for Movie Recording
• When Autofocus mode (A99) in the movie menu is set to A Single AF (default setting),
the focus is locked when the b (e movie-record) button is pressed to start movie recording. To
adjust the focus using the autofocus again while recording movies, press the multi selector J.
• When the focus mode (A72) is E (manual focus), adjust the focus manually. The focus can be
adjusted by pressing the multi selector H (Far) or I (Near) while recording movies.
• Autofocus may not perform as expected (A33). Should this occur, try E (manual focus) or the
following methods.
1. Before recording, set Autofocus mode in the movie menu to A Single AF (default setting).
2. Position a different subject at the same distance in the middle of the screen. Press the
b (e movie-record) button to start the movie recording, and change the composition.
Recording and Playing Back Movies
• The camera may become warm when recording movies for an extended period of time or when
the camera is used in a hot area.
• When the temperature inside the camera becomes extremely
high while recording a movie, recording automatically stops after
5 seconds. The remaining amount of recording time (B 5 s) is
displayed on the monitor. The camera turns off in 5 seconds after
movie recording automatically stops.
Leave the camera off until the inside of the camera has cooled
and then use it.
7m23s
97
Recording Movies
C
Maximum Movie Length
Movie options (A99)
Internal memory
(90 MB)
d HD 1080pP (1920×1080)
e HD 1080p (1920×1080)
f HD 720p (1280×720)
p
iFrame 540 (960×540)
g VGA (640×480)
Memory card
(4 GB)2
37 s1
25 min
57 s
40 min
1 min 25 s
1h
33 s1
25 min
4 min 11 s
2 h 50 min
All figures are approximate. The maximum movie length varies with the make of the memory card
and the bitrate of the recorded movie.
1 The maximum movie length for a single movie is 25 seconds.
2 The maximum movie length for a single movie is 4 GB or 29 minutes, even when there is sufficient
free space on the memory card. The maximum movie recording time for a single movie is
displayed during recording.
C
Recording and Playing Back Movies
98
Functions Available in Movie Recording
• The exposure compensation and White balance settings in shooting menu (A60) are also
applied with movie recording. When focus mode is set to D (macro close-up), the camera can
zoom to a position closer to the subject to record movies. Confirm settings before starting movie
recording.
• The self-timer (A69) can be used. If the self-timer is set and the b (e movie-record) button is
pressed, the camera starts movie recording after ten or two seconds.
• The flash does not fire.
• Press the d button before starting to record the movie to display the e (movie) tab and select
movie menu settings (A99).
C
Recording HS (High Speed) Movies
When Movie options in movie menu is set to h HS 120 fps (640×480), i HS 60 fps
(1280×720), or j HS 15 fps (1920×1080), movies that can be played back in slow motion or
fast motion can be recorded (E66).
C
More Information
See “File and Folder Names” (E98) for more information.
Recording Movies
Changing Movie Recording Settings (Movie Menu)
The following option settings can be changed.
Movie
Movie options
Autofocus mode
Display the shooting screen M d button M e tab (A13)
Option
Description
A
Movie options
Select the type of movie recorded. The camera can record
normal speed movies and high speed (HS) movies, which
can be played back in slow motion or fast motion. The
default setting is d HD 1080pP (1920×1080).
Autofocus mode
Select how the camera focuses when recording normal
speed movies.
Single AF (default setting) where the focus is locked when
movie recording begins, or Full-time AF where the camera
focuses continuously during movie recording can be selected. E68
When Full-time AF is selected, the sound of the camera
focusing may be heard in recorded movies. If you want to
prevent the sound of the camera focusing from being
recorded, select Single AF.
Recording and Playing Back Movies
C
E64
More Information
See “Note on the Command Dial Operation When Menus are Displayed” (A 14) for more
information.
99
Playing Back Movies
1
Press the c (playback) button to select
playback mode.
15/05/2012 15:30
0004.MOV
• Press the multi selector to select a movie.
• Movies can be recognized by the movie options icon
(A98).
10m16s
2
Press the k button to play back a movie.
Pausing
Adjusting the volume
Press the zoom control g/f (A2) during playback.
Operations available during movie playback
Rotate the multi selector to fast forward or rewind.
Playback controls appear at the top of the monitor.
Press the multi selector J or K to select an icon of
playback control, then press the k button to perform
the following operations.
7m42s
During
playback
Volume
indicator
Recording and Playing Back Movies
To
Use
Rewind
A
Rewind the movie while the k button is pressed down.
Advance
B
Advance the movie while the k button is pressed down.
Pause
E
End
G
Description
The following operations can be performed with the playback
controls at the top of the monitor while playback is paused.
Rewind the movie by one frame. Hold down the k
C
button to rewind continuously.*
Advance the movie by one frame. Hold down the k
D
button to advance continuously.*
Extract and save only the required parts of the movie
I
(E31).
Save the extracted frame from a movie as a still picture
H
(E32).
F
Resume playback.
Return to full-frame playback mode.
* The movie can also be advanced or rewound by one frame by rotating the multi selector.
To delete a movie, use full-frame playback mode (A34) or thumbnail playback
mode (A35) to select a movie and press the l button (A36).
B
100
Note on Movie Playback
Movies recorded with cameras other than COOLPIX P510 cannot be played back.
Using GPS
The Global Positioning System (GPS) is a satellite-based navigation system using
the electro-magnetic waves of a network of GPS satellites placed into orbit.
This chapter describes how to record the position information on the image using
GPS.
Using GPS
101
Using GPS
Starting GPS Data Recording
The camera’s internal GPS receives signals from the GPS satellites and calculates its
current time and position.
Calculation of the position is known as positioning.
The position information (latitude and longitude) can be recorded on the pictures
to be shot.
To start recording of the position information, set GPS options to Record GPS data.
Press the d button M z (GPS setting) tab (A14) M GPS options
Set Time zone and date (A108) correctly before using the GPS function.
1
2
Use the multi selector to select Record GPS
data, and then press the k button.
Select On and press the k button.
• Signals are received from the GPS satellite and
positioning starts.
• The default setting is Off.
Using GPS
102
3
GPS options
Record GPS data
Synchronize
Update A-GPS file
Record GPS data
On
Off
Press the d button.
• The camera returns to shooting screen.
• Operate in an open-air area when starting to receive signals from GPS satellites.
Starting GPS Data Recording
B
Notes on GPS
Using GPS
• It takes a few minutes to obtain position information when positioning is performed for the first
time or in a situation where positioning cannot be performed for a long period of time, or just after
the battery is replaced.
• If Record GPS data is set to On while a log is recorded using Create log (A105), GPS functions
even when the camera is turned off.
• Positions of the GPS satellites change constantly. You may not be able to determine the position
or it may take some time depending on your location and the time. To use the GPS feature, use the
camera in an open-air area with a few obstacles in the sky. Signal receiving will be smoother if the
GPS antenna (A2) is facing the sky.
• If the camera needs to be turned off inside an airplane or hospital, set the Record GPS data to
Off.
• The following locations which block or reflect signals may result in failed or inaccurate positioning.
- Inside buildings or at the basement of buildings
- Between high-rise buildings
- Under overpasses
- Inside tunnels
- Near high-voltage electrical power lines
- Between clusters of trees
- Underwater
• Using a mobile phone of 1.5 GHz band near this camera may disrupt positioning.
• When carrying this camera around while positioning, do not place it in a metal bag. Positioning
cannot be performed if the camera is covered with metal materials.
• When there is a significant difference in the signals from the GPS satellite, there could be a
deviation of up to several hundred meters.
• Be aware of your surroundings when positioning.
• The date and time of the camera’s internal clock at the time of shooting is recorded at the date
and time of recording indicators displayed on the camera during playback. The time obtained by
the position information and recorded on images will not be displayed on the camera.
• Position information will be recorded on the first frame of pictures shot using continuous shooting
mode.
• Positional information cannot be recorded onto movies.
• The geodetic system for this camera’s GPS function uses the WGS 84 (World Geodetic System
1984).
103
Starting GPS Data Recording
B
Note on Pictures with Recorded Position Information
An individual may be identified from still pictures that have been recorded with location
information. Observe caution when you transfer still pictures recorded with location information, or
GPS log files to a third party or upload them to a network such as the Internet where the public can
view them.
Be sure to read "Disposing of Data Storage Devices" (Av).
B
Notes on Using the Camera with GPS Function Overseas
• Before taking the camera with GPS function overseas for travel, consult your travel agency or
embassy of the country you are visiting to confirm whether there is any restriction on use.
For example, you cannot record location information logs without permission from the
government in China.
Set the Record GPS data of the GPS options menu to Off.
• The GPS may not function properly in China and on the borders between China and neighbouring
countries.
C
GPS Reception Indicator
GPS reception can be checked on the shooting screen.
• n: Signals are being received from four or more satellites and
determine position. Position information is recorded on the image.
• o: Signals are being received from three satellites and determine
position. Position information is recorded on the image.
• z: Signals are being received from the satellite, but positioning is
not possible. The position information is not recorded on the
image.
• y: Signals cannot be received from the satellite, and positioning is
not possible. The position information is not recorded on the
image.
Using GPS
104
C
GPS reception
25m 0s
1/250
F5.6
840
Pictures with Recorded Position Information
• The z icon is displayed during playback for images which have the position information recorded
(A10).
• Position information recorded on a picture can be checked on a map with ViewNX 2 after
transferring the image to a computer (A91).
• The actual place of shooting may differ from the GPS information recorded on the image files due
to the accuracy of the position information obtained and a difference in the geodetic system used.
Changing the GPS Settings (GPS Options Menu)
In GPS options menu, the following option settings
can be changed.
GPS options menu
GPS options
Create log
View log
Press the d button Mz (GPS setting) tab (A14)
Option
Description
A
E69
Create log
The measured tracking information is recorded until a
preset time set usingStart log has elapsed at the
interval set for Log interval (only when Record GPS
data in GPS options of the GPS options menu is set to
On).
• Select End log and save the recorded log data to a
memory card.
E71
View log
You can check or erase the log data stored in a memory
card by selecting Create log and then selecting End
log.
• When you select a log data and press the k button, E73
the movement route is displayed.
• To erase log data, select a log data and press the l
button.
C
Using GPS
GPS options
Record GPS data: When set to On, signals are being
received from the GPS satellite and positioning starts
(A102). The default setting is Off.
Signals from the GPS satellite are used to set the date
and time of the camera's internal clock (only when
Record GPS data in GPS options of the GPS options
menu is set to On).
Update A-GPS file: A memory card is used to update
the A-GPS (assist GPS) file. Using the latest A-GPS file
can shorten the time needed for tracking the position
information.
Displaying the Location Information of a Picture Taken during Log
Recording
You can display the shooting location of an image (latitude, longitude, and current location of the
movement being tracked for creating a log) by pressing the w button while a picture taken during
log recording is displayed in the full-frame playback mode after storing the log data in a memory
card.
105
106
General Camera Setup
This chapter describes the various settings that can be adjusted in the z setup
menu.
Set up
25m 0s
1/250
F5.6
840
Welcome screen
Time zone and date
Monitor settings
Print date
Vibration reduction
Motion detection
AF assist
General Camera Setup
• See “Using Menus (the d Button)” (A13) for more information about using
the camera’s menus.
• For further details about each setting, refer to “The Setup Menu” in the
Reference Section (E74).
107
General Camera Setup
The Setup Menu
Press the d button M z (setup) tab (A13)
From the menu screen, select the z tab to display the
setup menu, and then you can change the following
settings.
Option
General Camera Setup
108
Set up
Welcome screen
Time zone and date
Monitor settings
Print date
Vibration reduction
Motion detection
AF assist
Description
A
Welcome screen
Select the image displayed as the welcome screen
when the camera is turned on. Select COOLPIX to
display the COOLPIX logo. Select Select an image to
use a picture taken with the camera as the welcome
screen. The default setting is None.
E74
Time zone and date
Set settings related to the camera’s date and time. The
Time zone setting allows you to specify the time zone
where the camera is mainly used and whether or not
daylight saving time is in effect. When the x travel
destination is set, the camera automatically calculates
the time difference between the travel destination and
the w home time zone, and saves images using the
date and time of the travel destination.
E75
Monitor settings
Set the image display after shooting, the screen
brightness and whether or not to display a framing grid
or histograms on the monitor.
E78
Print date
Imprint the shooting date and time on pictures at the
time of shooting. The default setting is Off.
• Dates cannot be imprinted in the following
situations.
- When the scene mode is set to Easy panorama,
Panorama assist, or 3D photography
- When Pre-shooting cache, Continuous H: 120
fps or Continuous H: 60 fps is selected for
Continuous (A61) in the shooting menu
- During movie recording
E79
Vibration reduction
Reduce blurring caused by camera shake when
shooting. The default setting is On.
• When using a tripod to stabilize the camera, set this
feature to Off to prevent this feature from
malfunctioning.
E80
The Setup Menu
A
Motion detection
E81
AF assist
When set to Auto (default setting), the AF-assist
illuminator (A33) lights when shooting in dark
surroundings to help the camera focus.
• The illuminator has a range of about 4.0 m (13 ft) at
the maximum wide-angle position and about 2.1 m
(6 ft 10 in.) at the maximum telephoto position.
• Even if Auto is selected, the AF-assist illuminator may
not light depending on the position of the focus area
or the scene mode that is selected.
E82
Digital zoom
When set to On (default setting), when the optical
zoom is at the maximum telephoto zoom position,
rotating the zoom control toward g (i) triggers the
digital zoom (A31).
• The digital zoom cannot be used simultaneously in
certain settings such as the shooting mode.
E82
Assign side zoom
control
Select the function to be performed during shooting
when the side zoom control is rotated. When set to
Zoom (default setting), the zoom control operation is
enabled.
E83
Sound settings
Turn various camera sounds on and off. In the default
setting, beep sounds are on.
• The operation sound is disabled in certain settings
such as shooting mode.
E84
Auto off
Set the amount of time that passes before the monitor
is turned off to save power. The default setting is 1 min.
E84
Format memory/
Format card
Format the internal memory (only when a memory card
is not inserted) or the memory card (when a memory
card is inserted).
• All data stored in the internal memory or on the
memory card is deleted during formatting and
cannot be restored. Be sure to transfer important
images to a computer and save them before
formatting.
E85
Language
Change the camera’s display language.
E85
General Camera Setup
Description
When the camera detects camera shake or subject
movement at the time of shooting, it automatically
increases ISO sensitivity and shutter speed to reduce
blurring. The default setting is Auto.
The r indicator lights in green when the camera
detects camera shake or subject movement and
increases shutter speed.
• When using certain shooting modes or settings,
motion is not detected. In this case the r indicator is
not displayed.
Option
109
The Setup Menu
Description
A
TV settings
Adjust settings for connection to television.
• When the camera is connected to a television using
an audio/video cable but no picture is displayed on
the television, set Video mode to NTSC or PAL
according to the type of signal compatible with the
television.
• HDMI settings can be set.
E86
Fn button
Assign the frequently used shooting menu to the w
(FUNC) button. The default setting is Continuous.
E87
Charge by computer
When set to Auto (default setting), you can charge the
camera’s battery by connecting the camera to a
computer (provided that the computer is able to
supply power).
• When charging by computer, it may take more time
to charge the battery than when using the Charging
AC Adapter EH-69P. Additionally, when charging by
computer and transferring images to the computer,
it takes more time to charge the battery.
E88
Toggle Av/Tv
selection
Switch the method for setting the flexible program,
shutter speed or aperture value.
When Do not toggle selection (default setting) is
selected, use the command dial to set the flexible
program or shutter speed and use the multi selector to
set the aperture value.
When Toggle selection is selected, use the multi
selector to set the flexible program or shutter speed
and use the command dial to set the aperture value.
• This option is enabled only when the shooting mode
is j, k, l, m, or M.
E90
Reset file numbering
When Yes is selected, the sequential numbering of file
numbers is reset. After resetting, a new folder is created
and the file number for the next image taken starts
from “0001.”
E90
Blink warning
When the camera detects that a human subject may
have closed the eyes immediately after taking a picture
using face detection while shooting with modes other
than the smile timer (A85), the Did someone blink?
screen is displayed on the monitor to check the picture
taken. The default setting is Off.
E91
Filmstrip
When On is selected, thumbnails of previous and
subsequent images are displayed at the bottom of the
monitor when you rotate the multi selector quickly
while viewing an image in full-frame playback mode
(A34). The default setting is Off.
E92
Option
General Camera Setup
110
The Setup Menu
Option
Description
A
Eye-Fi upload
Set whether or not to enable the function for sending
images to a computer using a commercially available
Eye-Fi card. The default setting is Disable.
E93
Reverse indicators
Set the +/– display direction of exposure indicator to be
displayed when the shooting mode is m.
E94
Reset all
Reset the camera’s settings to their default values.
• Some of the settings such as Time zone and date
and Language and user settings that were saved for
mode dial M are not reset.
E94
Firmware version
Display the current camera firmware version.
E97
General Camera Setup
C
More Information
See “Note on the Command Dial Operation When Menus are Displayed” (A 14) for more
information.
111
112
E
Reference Section
The Reference Section provides detailed information and hints for using the
camera.
Shooting
Taking Pictures with Manual Focus ..................................................................... E2
Using Easy Panorama (Shooting and Playing back) ...................................... E3
Using Panorama Assist ............................................................................................. E6
Using 3D Photography............................................................................................. E8
j, k, l, m Modes...................................................................................................E10
Playback
Playing and Deleting Images Captured Using Continuous Shooting Mode
(Sequence) ..................................................................................................................E13
Editing Still Images ..................................................................................................E15
Connecting the Camera to a TV (Viewing Images on a TV).......................E23
Connecting the Camera to a Printer (Direct Print) .......................................E25
Editing Movies ...........................................................................................................E31
Shooting Menu (j, k, l or m Mode)..............................................................E33
The Playback Menu..................................................................................................E55
The Movie Menu .......................................................................................................E64
GPS Setting Menu ....................................................................................................E69
The Setup Menu........................................................................................................E74
Additional Information
File and Folder Names ............................................................................................E98
Optional Accessories............................................................................................ E100
Error Messages ....................................................................................................... E101
E1
Reference Section
Menu
Reference Section
Taking Pictures with Manual Focus
Available when the shooting mode is j, k, l, m, M, special effects mode or the
Sports scene mode.
1
Press the multi selector I (p
focus mode).
• Use the multi selector to choose E
(manual focus) and press the k button.
• W is displayed on the top of the monitor,
and the center area of a picture is
enlarged.
2
Adjust the focus.
• Use the multi selector to adjust the focus while viewing
the image on the monitor.
• Press H to focus on far subjects.
• Press I to focus on near subjects.
• Press the shutter-release button halfway to check the
composition. Press the shutter-release button all the
way to take the picture.
3
Reference Section
1/250
F5.6
1/250
F5.6
840
Press the k button.
• The set focus is locked. You can continue shooting with
the locked focus.
• To readjust the focus, press the k button again to
display the screen in step 2.
• To change back to autofocus, return to step 1 and
choose any setting other than E.
C
Manual focus
25m 0s
840
E (Manual Focus)
• In step 2, the figure displayed with the gauge at the right of the monitor indicates an approximate
distance (m) at which the subject can be in focus when the gauge is near the center. The actual
range at which the subject can be in focus varies depending on the aperture value and zoom
position. To see whether the subject is in focus, check the subject on the monitor.
• Press the shutter-release button halfway to preview an approximate depth of field (the area in
focus behind and in front of the subject).
• Set Assign side zoom control (E83) in the setup menu to Manual focus to focus by using the
side zoom control instead of H or I in step 2.
• The digital zoom is not available.
E2
Using Easy Panorama (Shooting and Playing back)
Taking Pictures with Easy Panorama
Rotate the mode dial to y M d button M p Panorama
1
Select V Easy panorama and press the k
button.
2
Select the shooting range from W Normal
(180°) or X Wide (360°), and press the k
button.
Panorama
Easy panorama
Panorama assist
Easy panorama
Normal (180°)
Wide (360°)
3
Frame the first portion of the panorama
scene, and press the shutter-release button
halfway to adjust the focus.
• The zoom is fixed at the wide-angle position.
25m 0s
• The framing guide is displayed on the monitor.
1/250 F5.6
F3.1 1840
• The camera focuses on the subject at the center of the
frame.
• Exposure compensation (A74) can be adjusted.
• If the focus or exposure cannot be set for the main subject, try the focus lock (A86).
E3
Reference Section
• The image sizes (W × H) when the camera is held in
landscape orientation are as follows.
- W Normal (180°):
3200 × 560 when the camera is moved horizontally,
1024 × 3200 when the camera is moved vertically
- X Wide (360°):
6400 × 560 when the camera is moved horizontally,
1024 × 6400 when the camera is moved vertically
• For the image sizes when the camera is held in “tall” orientation, the combinations of
the moving direction and W × H are the opposites of the above.
Using Easy Panorama (Shooting and Playing back)
4
Press the shutter-release button all the way,
and release it.
• The I icons showing the panorama direction are
displayed.
5
Move the camera straight and slowly in one
of the four directions to start shooting.
• When the camera detects the panorama direction, the
shooting starts.
• The guide showing the current shooting point is
displayed.
• When the guide showing the shooting point reaches
the end, the shooting ends.
Guide
Example of moving the camera
Reference Section
• The user, without shifting position, moves the camera, from end to end of the guide, horizontally
or vertically in an arc.
• If about 15 seconds (in W Normal (180°)) or 30 seconds (in X Wide (360°)) pass from the
start of the shooting, and before the guide showing the shooting point reaches the end, the
shooting ends.
B
Notes on Easy Panorama Shooting
• The image area seen in the saved image will be narrower than that seen on the monitor at the
time of shooting.
• When the camera movement speed is too fast, there is a large amount of camera shake or there is
little change in subject such as wall or in the dark, the shooting ends in an error.
• Panorama pictures are not saved when the shooting stops before reaching half of the panorama
range.
• When the shooting reaches more than half of the panorama range but finishes before the end
point, the range that is not shot will be recorded as a gray area.
E4
Using Easy Panorama (Shooting and Playing back)
Viewing Easy Panorama (Scroll)
Switch to playback mode (A34), display the picture
recorded with easy panorama in full-frame playback
mode and press the k button. The camera displays the
short side of the picture filling the entire screen and
scrolls the displayed area automatically.
• W or X is displayed for pictures recorded with
easy panorama.
15/05/2012 15:30
0004.JPG
4/ 132
• The picture is scrolled in the direction of the
panorama shooting.
• Rotate the multi selector to advance or rewind.
Playback controls are displayed at the top of the
monitor during playback. When you choose a playback
control with the multi selector J or K and press the k
button, the following operations can be performed.
To
Use
Rewind
A
Scroll quickly back while the k button is pressed.
Description
Advance
B
Scroll quickly forward while the k button is pressed.
The following operations can be performed with the playback
controls at the top of the monitor while playback is paused.
Pause
G
C
Rewind while the k button is pressed.*
D
Scroll while the k button is pressed.*
F
Restart the automatic scroll.
Reference Section
End
E
Return to full-frame playback mode.
* Scrolling can also be performed by rotating the multi selector.
B
Note on Viewing Pictures Recorded with Easy Panorama
Panorama pictures recorded with functions other than easy panorama of the COOLPIX P510 may
not be scrolled or zoomed on this camera.
E5
Using Panorama Assist
Using a tripod makes the composition easier. When using a tripod to stabilize the
camera, set Vibration reduction (E80) to Off in the setup menu.
Rotate the mode dial to y M d button M p Panorama
1
Select U Panorama assist and press the k
button.
• The I icon is displayed to show the direction in which
pictures are joined.
2
Panorama
Easy panorama
Panorama assist
Use the multi selector to choose the direction,
and press the k button.
Reference Section
• Select the direction in which pictures are joined in the
completed panorama: right (I), left (J), up (K) or
25m 0s
down (L).
• The yellow icon (II) moves to the selected direction,
840
1/250 F3.0
so press the k button to select the direction. A white
icon (I) is displayed in the selected direction.
• Apply flash mode (A66), self-timer (A69), focus mode (A72) and exposure
compensation (A74) settings with this step, if necessary.
• Press the k button again to reselect the direction.
3
Frame the first portion of the
panorama scene, and take the first
picture.
• The camera focuses on the subject at the
center of the frame.
• 1/3 of the image will be displayed as
translucent.
4
F3.0
840
Shoot the next picture.
• Match the outline of the next picture so that
1/3 of the frame overlaps the previous
picture, and press the shutter-release button.
• Repeat until you have taken the necessary
number of pictures to complete the image.
E6
25m 0s
1/250
25m 0s
End
839
Using Panorama Assist
5
Press the k button when shooting is completed.
• The camera returns to step 2.
B
Notes on Panorama Assist
• Set the flash mode, self-timer, focus mode and exposure compensation before releasing the
shutter for the first picture. The settings cannot be changed after shooting the first picture.
Pictures cannot be deleted, nor can zoom, Image quality (A77), or Image size (A78) be
adjusted after shooting the first picture.
• The panorama series is terminated if the auto off function (E84) triggers the standby mode
during shooting. To prevent this, setting a longer time for the auto off function is recommended.
C
R (Exposure Lock) Indicator
C
25m 0s
End
839
Panorama Creation with Panorama Maker 6
Transfer pictures to a computer (A93) and use Panorama Maker 6 to join them in a single
panorama.
• Panorama Maker 6 can be installed on a computer using the included ViewNX 2 Installer CD
(A91).
• After installation is complete, follow the procedure described below to start Panorama Maker 6.
Windows: Choose Start menu>All Programs>ArcSoft Panorama Maker 6>Panorama
Maker 6.
Mac OS X: Open Applications and double-click the Panorama Maker 6 icon.
• For more information on using Panorama Maker 6, refer to the on-screen instructions and help
information contained in Panorama Maker 6.
C
More Information
See “File and Folder Names” (E98) for more information.
E7
Reference Section
When using panorama assist mode, all pictures in the panorama
have the same exposure, white balance, and focus as the first
picture of the panorama.
When the first picture is shot, R is displayed on the monitor
to indicate that exposure, white balance, and focus are locked.
Using 3D Photography
The camera takes one picture for each eye to simulate a three-dimensional image
on a 3D-compatible TV or monitor.
Rotate the mode dial to y M d button M s 3D photography
1
Frame the subject.
• The focus area that the camera focuses on can be
moved to areas other than the center of the frame. To
move the focus area, press the k button before taking
the first picture, and then rotate the multi selector or
press H, I, J, or K.
To adjust the following settings, press the k button to
temporarily cancel focus area selection, and then
adjust each setting.
– Focus mode (A (Autofocus) or p (macro close-up))
– Exposure compensation
2
25m 0s
1/250
F3.0
F5.6
6030
Press the shutter-release button to take the first picture.
• The focus, exposure and white balance are locked after the first shot,
and R is displayed on the monitor.
3
Reference Section
Move the camera horizontally to the right
until the translucent guide is aligned with
the subject.
• To cancel shooting, press the k button.
Cancel
4
Wait for the camera to automatically release the shutter.
• The camera automatically takes the second picture when it detects that the subject is
aligned with the guide.
• Shooting is canceled if the subject is not aligned with the guide within ten seconds.
E8
Using 3D Photography
B
Taking 3D Pictures
• Moving subjects are not suited to 3D photography. We recommend shooting still subjects.
• Pictures have a less pronounced 3D feel as the distance between the camera and background is
increased.
• Pictures may have a less pronounced 3D feel when the subject is dark or when the second picture
is not aligned precisely.
• Be careful of camera shake when shooting at the telephoto zoom position.
• The telephoto zoom position is restricted to an angle of view equivalent to that of about 135 mm
lens in 35mm [135] format.
• The angle of view (i.e., the area visible in the frame) seen in the saved picture will be narrower than
that seen on the monitor at the time of shooting.
• Pictures taken under dim lighting may appear grainy with noise.
• If the camera does not take the second picture and cancels the shooting even when you align the
guide with the subject, try shooting with the shutter-release button.
B
Notes on Viewing 3D Pictures
• 3D pictures cannot be played back in 3D on the camera monitor. See “Viewing 3D Photography”
(A53) for more information.
• When viewing 3D pictures on a 3D-compatible TV or monitor for an extended period of time, you
may experience discomfort such as eye strain or nausea. Carefully read the documentation
included with your TV or monitor to ensure proper use.
Reference Section
E9
j, k, l, m Modes
j (Programmed auto), k (Shutter-priority auto) or
l (Aperture-priority auto)
1
Rotate the mode dial to j, k or l.
25m 0s
1/250
2
F5.6
840
Rotate the command dial or multi selector to set the exposure.
• In j mode, the flexible program (A59) can be set using the command dial.
• In k mode, the shutter speed can be set in a range from a maximum speed of
1/4000 to 4 seconds using the command dial.
• In l mode, the aperture value can be set in a range of f/3 to 8.3 (wide-angle position)
and f/5.9 to 8.3 (telephoto zoom position) using the multi selector.
3
Frame the subject and shoot.
Reference Section
• In the default setting, the camera has nine focus areas,
and automatically selects the focus areas containing the
subject closest to the camera. When the subject is in
focus, the focus areas that are in focus (up to nine areas)
light in green (E47).
B
Notes on Shooting
• When zooming is performed after the exposure is set, exposure combinations or aperture value
may be changed.
• When the subject is too dark or too bright, it may not be possible to obtain the appropriate
exposure. In such cases, the shutter speed indicator or aperture value indicator flashes when the
shutter-release button is pressed halfway. Change the shutter speed setting or aperture value.
When settings such as ISO sensitivity (E45) are changed, the appropriate exposure may be
obtained.
C
Shutter Speed
The control range of the shutter speed differs depending on the aperture value or the ISO sensitivity
setting (A83).
E10
j, k, l, m Modes
m (Manual) Mode
The user controls both the shutter speed and aperture value.
• The shutter speed can be set in a range from a maximum speed of 1/4000 to 8 seconds.
1
Rotate the mode dial to m.
2
Rotate the command dial to set a
shutter speed.
• See A59 for more information on
exposure indicator.
25m 0s
1/125
F5.6
840
Exposure indicator
3
Rotate the multi selector to set an
aperture value.
• Repeat steps 2 to 3 to adjust shutter speed
and aperture value settings until the
desired exposure is achieved.
25m 0s
4
Focus and shoot.
• In the default setting, the camera has nine focus areas,
and automatically selects the focus areas containing
the subject closest to the camera. When the subject is
in focus, the focus areas that are in focus (up to nine
areas) light in green (E47).
F8.0
840
Reference Section
1/125
E11
j, k, l, m Modes
B
Note on Shooting
When zooming is performed after the exposure is set, aperture value may be changed.
B
Note on ISO Sensitivity
When ISO sensitivity (E45) is set to Auto (default setting) or Fixed range auto, ISO sensitivity is
fixed at ISO 100.
C
Shutter Speed
The control range of the shutter speed differs depending on the aperture value or the ISO sensitivity
setting (A83).
Reference Section
E12
Playing and Deleting Images Captured Using Continuous Shooting Mode (Sequence)
The images shot in the following continuous shooting mode are saved as a group
(called a “sequence”) each time you shoot.
• Continuous H, Continuous L, Pre-shooting cache, Continuous H: 120 fps
or Continuous H: 60 fps in Continuous (E41) in the shooting menu
• Sports (A46) or Continuous in the Pet portrait (A52) scene mode
Playing Images in a Sequence
In full-frame playback mode or thumbnail playback
mode (A35), the first image of a sequence is used as
the “key picture”, i.e., it is displayed to represent the
images in the sequence.
Sequence display
15/05/2012
0004.JPG
15:30
4 132
5
While the key picture of a sequence is displayed in fullframe playback mode, press the k button to display
each image in the sequence individually. To return to key
picture only display, press the multi selector H.
15/05/2012
0004.JPG
Back
15:30
1
5
Reference Section
The following operations can be performed when each image in a sequence is
displayed individually.
• Select an image: Rotate the multi selector or press J or K.
• Zoom in: Rotate the zoom control toward g (i) (A35).
B
Note on Sequence
Pictures captured continuously with cameras other than COOLPIX P510 cannot be displayed as a
sequence.
C
Sequence Display Options
Select Sequence display options (E63) in the playback menu to set all sequences to be
displayed using their key pictures or to display them as individual images.
If an image in the sequence is selected when Sequence display options is set to Individual
pictures, F icon is displayed on the monitor.
E13
Playing and Deleting Images Captured Using Continuous Shooting Mode (Sequence)
C
Changing Key Picture in Sequence
A sequence’s key picture can be changed using Choose key picture (E63) in the playback menu.
C
Playback Menu Options Available When Using Sequence
When the d button is pressed during an image sequence playback, the following menu
operations are available.
➝ E17
➝ E17
• Quick retouch1
• D-Lighting1
1
➝
E18
➝ E19
• Skin softening
• Filter effects1
➝ E55
➝ E57
• Print order2
• Slide show
➝ E58
➝ E60
• Protect2
• Rotate image1
➝ E20
➝ E61
• Small picture1
• Voice memo1
➝ E62
➝ E21
• Copy2
• Black border1
➝ E63
➝ E63
• Sequence display options
• Choose key picture
1
Press the d button after displaying individual images. Settings can be applied to individual
images.
2
When the d button is pressed during displaying only the key picture, the same settings can be
applied to all images in that sequence. Press the d button after displaying individual images to
apply settings to individual images.
Deleting Images in a Sequence
Reference Section
When Sequence display options (E63) is set to Key picture only in the
playback menu, if the l button is pressed and the deletion method is selected,
the following images are deleted.
• When a sequence is displayed by its key picture only:
- Current image: When the sequence is selected, all images in the sequence
are deleted.
- Erase selected images: When the key picture is selected in the erase
selected images screen (A37), all images in the sequence are deleted.
- All images: All images including the sequence that is displayed are deleted.
• If the key picture is selected and the k button is pressed to display individual
images in the sequence before pressing the l button:
The deletion methods change to the followings.
- Erase current picture: Delete the image that is
displayed.
Delete
- Erase selected images: Select multiple images in
the sequence to delete in the erase selected
Erase current picture
images screen (A37).
Erase selected images
- Erase entire sequence: All images in the
Erase entire sequence
sequence, including the image that is displayed,
are deleted.
E14
Editing Still Images
Editing Features
Images can be easily edited with this camera using the functions below. Edited
images are stored as separate files (E98).
Editing function
Application
Quick retouch (E17)
Easily create a copy with enhanced contrast and richer colors.
D-Lighting (E17)
Create a copy of the current picture with enhanced brightness
and contrast, brightening dark portions of the picture.
Skin softening (E18)
Make the facial skin tones softer.
Filter effects (E19)
Apply a variety of effects using digital filter effects. The available
effects are Selective color, Cross screen, Fisheye, Miniature
effect and Painting.
Small picture (E20)
Create a small copy of pictures suitable for uses such as e-mail
attachments.
Black border (E21)
Add a black frame around the picture. Use when you want to
add a black border to a picture.
Crop (E22)
Crop a portion of the picture. Use to zoom in on a subject or
arrange a composition.
Notes on Image Editing
• The following pictures cannot be edited.
- Pictures taken using an aspect ratio of 16:9, 3:2, or 1:1 (except when using the black border
editing function)
- Pictures taken using Easy panorama or 3D photography
- Pictures taken with cameras other than COOLPIX P510
• When no faces are detected in the picture, skin softening cannot be applied (E18).
• If a copy created using the COOLPIX P510 is viewed on a different digital camera, it may not be
possible to display the picture properly or transfer it to a computer.
• Editing functions are not available when there is not enough free space in the internal memory or
on the memory card.
• For a sequence displayed using the key picture only setting (E13), perform one of the following
operations before editing.
- Press the k button to display individual images, and then select an image in the sequence
- Set Sequence display options (E63) to Individual pictures so that each image is displayed
individually, and then select an image
Reference Section
B
E15
Editing Still Images
C
Restrictions on Image Editing
The following restrictions apply when editing pictures that were created by editing.
Editing functions used
Editing functions to add
Quick retouch
D-Lighting
Skin softening, Filter effects, Small picture, Black border or Crop
can be used.
Quick retouch and D-Lighting cannot be used in combination
with each other.
Skin softening
Quick retouch, D-Lighting, Filter effects, Small picture, Black
border or Crop can be used.
Filter effects
Quick retouch, D-Lighting, Skin softening, Small picture, Black
border or Crop can be used.
Small picture
No additional editing functions can be used.
Black border
Small picture can be used.
Crop
Black border can be used.
• Copies created by editing cannot be edited again using the same editing function.
• To use an editing function together with small picture, use the other editing function first, and use
small picture as the last editing function performed on that picture.
• Pictures that were taken using skin softening can be edited using skin softening.
• Picture that has been extracted from a movie cannot be edited using the quick retouch or skin
softening function.
C
Original Pictures and Edited Copies
Reference Section
• Copies created with editing functions are not deleted if the original pictures are deleted. The
original pictures are not deleted if copies created with editing functions are deleted.
• Edited copies are stored with the same shooting date and time as the original.
• Even if the pictures that are marked for Print order (E55) or Protect (E58) are used for
editing, these settings are not reflected on the edited copies.
E16
Editing Still Images
k Quick Retouch: Enhancing Contrast and Saturation
Select a picture (A34) M d button (A13) M k Quick retouch
Press the multi selector H or I to choose the
setting level, and press the k button.
Quick retouch
• The original version is displayed on the left and the
edited version is displayed on the right.
• To cancel, press J.
Normal
Amount
• Quick retouched copies can be recognized by the s
icon displayed in playback mode.
15/05/2012 15:30
0004.JPG
4/ 132
I D-Lighting: Enhancing Brightness and Contrast
Select a picture (A34) M d button (A13) M I D-Lighting
• The original version is displayed on the left and the
edited version is displayed on the right.
• To cancel, press J.
Reference Section
Press the multi selector H or I to choose the
setting level, and press the k button.
D-Lighting
Normal
Amount
• D-Lighting copies can be recognized by the c icon
displayed in playback mode.
15/05/2012 15:30
0004.JPG
4/ 132
C
More Information
See “File and Folder Names” (E98) for more information.
E17
Editing Still Images
e Skin Softening: Softening Skin Tones
Select a picture (A34) M d button (A13) M e Skin softening
1
Press the multi selector H or I to choose the
setting level, and press the k button.
Skin softening
• A confirmation screen is displayed, and the image is
displayed zoomed in on the face edited by skin
softening.
• To cancel, press J.
2
Confirm the results.
Normal
Amount
Preview
• Up to 12 faces, in order of proximity to the center of the
frame, can be enhanced.
• When multiple faces are edited using skin softening,
use the multi selector J or K to switch the face that is
displayed.
Back
• To adjust the extent of skin softening, press the d
button and return to step 1.
• To create a copy edited with skin softening, press the k button.
• Copies created by editing with skin softening can be
15/05/2012
0004.JPG
recognized by the E icon displayed in playback mode.
Save
15:30
Reference Section
4/ 132
B
Notes on Skin Softening
• Depending on conditions such as the direction the subject is facing or the brightness of the face,
the face may not be detected properly, or the desired effect may not be achieved.
• If no faces are detected in the image, a warning is displayed and the screen returns to the playback
menu.
C
More Information
See “File and Folder Names” (E98) for more information.
E18
Editing Still Images
p Filter Effects: Applying Digital Filter Effects
Select a picture (A34) M d button (A13) M p Filter effects
Option
Description
Selective color
Keep only the selected image color and make other colors
black-and-white.
Cross screen
Produce star-like rays of light that radiate outward from bright
objects such as sunlight reflections and city lights. Suitable for
night scenes.
Fisheye
Create images that look like they were shot with a fisheye lens.
Suitable for pictures shot in macro mode.
Miniature effect
Create images that look like close-up photos of a diorama.
Suitable for pictures shot while looking down from a high
location, with the main subject near the center of the frame.
Painting
Create images with the ambience of paintings.
1
Press the multi selector H or I to choose the
filter effect type, and press the k button.
• When Cross screen, Fisheye, Miniature effect or
Painting is selected, proceed to step 3.
Adjust the effect and press the k button.
• Selective color: Press H or I to select the color to
keep.
Selective color
Cross screen
Fisheye
Miniature effect
Painting
Selective color
Reference Section
2
Filter effects
E19
Editing Still Images
3
Confirm the result and press the k button.
Preview
• A new, edited copy is created.
• To cancel, press J.
Back
• Copies created by editing with filter effects can be
recognized by the c icon displayed in playback mode.
Save
15/05/2012 15:30
0004.JPG
4/ 132
g Small Picture: Reducing the Size of an Image
Select a picture (A34) M d button (A13) M g Small picture
1
Press the multi selector H or I to choose the
desired copy size, and press the k button.
Reference Section
• The available sizes are 640×480, 320×240 and
160×120.
2
More Information
See “File and Folder Names” (E98) for more information.
E20
640×480
320×240
160×120
Choose Yes and press the k button.
• A new, smaller copy is created.
• Image quality is saved as Basic (compression ratio of
about 1:16).
• To cancel, choose No and press the k button.
• Copies created by editing with small picture editing
function are displayed with a black frame.
C
Small picture
Create small picture file?
Yes
No
Editing Still Images
j Black Border: Adding a Black Border to Pictures
Select a picture (A34) M d button (A13) M j Black border
1
Press the multi selector H or I to choose the
desired frame thickness, and press the k
button.
Black border
Thin
Medium
Broad
• Choose a frame thickness from Thin, Medium or
Broad line.
2
Choose Yes and press the k button.
• A new copy with a black border is created.
• To cancel, choose No and press the k button.
• Copies created by editing with black border editing
function can be recognized by the J icon displayed in
playback mode.
Create a copy with a
black border?
Yes
No
Reference Section
B
Notes on Black Border
• A part of the picture equivalent to the thickness of the black border is cut off because the black
border overlaps the picture.
• When a picture with a black border is printed using a printer’s borderless print function, the black
border may not be printed.
C
More Information
See “File and Folder Names” (E98) for more information.
E21
Editing Still Images
a Crop: Creating a Cropped Copy
Create a copy containing only the portion visible on the monitor when u is
displayed with playback zoom (A35) enabled. Cropped copies are stored as
separate files.
1
2
Enlarge the picture for cropping (A35).
Refine copy composition.
• Rotate the zoom control toward g (i) or f (h) to
adjust the zoom ratio.
• Press the multi selector H, I, J or K to scroll the
picture until only the portion you want to copy is
visible on the monitor.
3
Press the d button.
4
Use the multi selector to choose Yes, and press
the k button.
Reference Section
• A new cropped copy is created.
• To cancel, choose No and press the k button.
4.0
Save this image as
displayed?
Yes
No
C
Image Size
The narrower the cropping range, the smaller the size (amount of pixels) of the cropped picture
copy. When the image size setting is resized to 320 × 240 or 160 × 120 by cropping, a black frame
appears around the picture during playback, and the C small picture icon is displayed on the left
side of the monitor.
C
Cropping the Picture in its Current “Tall” Orientation
Use the Rotate image option (E60) to rotate the picture so that it is displayed in landscape
orientation. After cropping the picture, rotate the cropped picture back to “tall” orientation. The
picture displayed in “tall” orientation can be cropped by zooming in on the picture until the black
bars displayed on the both sides of the monitor disappear. The cropped picture is displayed in
landscape orientation.
C
More Information
See “File and Folder Names” (E98) for more information.
E22
Connecting the Camera to a TV (Viewing Images on a TV)
Connect the camera to a television to play back pictures on the television.
If your television is equipped with an HDMI connector, you can connect it to the
camera with a commercially available HDMI cable to play back pictures.
1
Turn off the camera.
2
Connect the camera to the TV.
When connecting using the included audio/video cable
• Connect the yellow plug to the video-in jack on the TV, and the red and white plugs
to the audio-in jacks.
Yellow White Red
• Connect the plug to the HDMI input connector on the TV.
Reference Section
When connecting using a commercially available HDMI cable
To the HDMI input connector
HDMI mini connector
(Type C)
E23
Connecting the Camera to a TV (Viewing Images on a TV)
3
Tune the television to the video channel.
• See the instruction manual provided with your TV for details.
4
Hold down the c button to turn on the
camera.
• The camera enters playback mode, and the recorded
pictures are displayed on the TV.
• While the camera is connected to the TV, the monitor
remains off.
B
Notes on Connecting an HDMI Cable
An HDMI cable is not included. Use a commercially available HDMI cable to connect the camera to a
TV. The output terminal on this camera is a HDMI Mini Connector (Type C). When purchasing an
HDMI cable, be sure that the device end of the cable is a HDMI Mini Connector.
B
Notes on Connecting the Cable
Reference Section
• When connecting the cable, be sure that the plug is oriented correctly. Do not force the plug into
the camera. When disconnecting the cable, do not pull the plug at an angle.
• Do not connect cables to the HDMI mini connector and USB/audio video connector
simultaneously.
B
When Nothing Appears on the TV
Make sure that TV settings (E86) in the setup menu is appropriate for your television.
C
Using the TV’s Remote Control (HDMI Device Control)
The remote control of a TV that conforms to the HDMI-CEC standard can be used to operate the
camera during playback.
Instead of the multi selector or zoom control, the remote control can be used for picture selection,
playback/pause of movies, switching between full-frame playback and 4-picture thumbnail display,
etc.
• Set HDMI device control (E86) of TV settings to On (default setting) in the setup menu, and
connect the camera to the TV with an HDMI cable.
• Point the remote control at the TV to operate.
• See your TV’s instruction manual or other related documentation to check whether your TV
conforms to the HDMI-CEC standard.
E24
Connecting the Camera to a Printer (Direct Print)
Users of PictBridge-compatible (F18) printers can connect the camera directly to
the printer and print pictures without using a computer. The steps for printing are
as follows.
Take pictures
Choose the pictures for printing
using the print order option
(Print order: E55)
Connect the camera to the printer (E26)
Print individual pictures
(E27)
Print multiple pictures (E28)
When printing is complete, turn the camera off and disconnect the USB cable
Notes on Power Source
• When connecting the camera to a printer, use a fully charged battery to prevent the camera from
turning off unexpectedly.
• If the AC Adapter EH-62A (available separately) (E100) is used, COOLPIX P510 can be powered
from an electrical outlet. Do not, under any circumstances, use an AC Adapter other than the EH62A. Failure to observe this precaution could result in overheating or damage to the camera.
C
Reference Section
B
Printing Pictures
In addition to printing pictures transferred to a computer and printing pictures with a direct camerato-printer connection, the following options are also available for printing pictures recorded on the
memory card:
• Insert a memory card into a DPOF-compatible printer’s card slot.
• Take a memory card to a digital photo lab.
For printing using these methods, specify the pictures and the number of prints each using the
Print order (E55) option in the playback menu.
E25
Connecting the Camera to a Printer (Direct Print)
Connecting the Camera to a Printer
1
Turn off the camera.
2
Turn on the printer.
• Check the printer settings.
3
Connect the camera to the printer using the included USB cable.
• Be sure that the plug is oriented correctly. When disconnecting the cable, do not pull
the plug at an angle.
Reference Section
4
The camera is automatically turned on.
• When connected correctly, the PictBridge startup
screen (1) is displayed on the camera monitor. Then
the Print selection screen (2) is displayed.
1
2
Print selection
15/05
2012
NO. 32
32
B
If the PictBridge Startup Screen Is Not Displayed
Turn the camera off and disconnect the USB cable. Set the Charge by computer option (E88) in
the camera’s setup menu to Off and reconnect the cable.
E26
Connecting the Camera to a Printer (Direct Print)
Printing Individual Images
After connecting the camera to the printer correctly (E26), print pictures by
following the procedure below.
1
Use the multi selector to choose the picture to
be printed, and press the k button.
Print selection
15/05
2012
• Rotate the zoom control toward f (h) to display
12 thumbnails, or toward g (i) to switch back to fullframe playback mode.
2
Choose Copies and press the k button.
NO. 32
32
PictBridge
1 prints
Start print
Copies
Paper size
3
Choose the number of copies (up to nine) and
press the k button.
Copies
4
Choose Paper size and press the k button.
PictBridge
4 prints
Reference Section
4
Start print
Copies
Paper size
C
More Information
See “Printing Images of Size 1:1” (A79) for more information.
E27
Connecting the Camera to a Printer (Direct Print)
5
Choose the desired paper size and press the
k button.
• To specify the paper size using the printer settings,
choose Default in the paper size menu.
6
Choose Start print and press the k button.
Paper size
Default
3.5×5 in.
5×7 in.
100×150 mm
4×6 in.
8×10 in.
Letter
PictBridge
4 prints
Start print
Copies
Paper size
7
Printing starts.
• The monitor display returns to that shown in step 1
when printing is complete.
• To cancel before all copies have been printed, press
the k button.
Printing
002 / 004
Cancel
Current print/total
number of prints
Reference Section
Printing Multiple Images
After connecting the camera to the printer correctly (E26), print pictures by
following the procedure below.
1
When the Print selection screen is displayed,
press the d button.
2
Use the multi selector to choose Paper size,
and press the k button.
• To exit the print menu, press the d button.
E28
Print menu
Print selection
Print all images
DPOF printing
Paper size
Connecting the Camera to a Printer (Direct Print)
3
Choose the desired paper size and press the
k button.
• To specify the paper size using the printer settings,
choose Default in the paper size menu.
4
Choose Print selection, Print all images or
DPOF printing and press the k button.
Paper size
Default
3.5×5 in.
5×7 in.
100×150 mm
4×6 in.
8×10 in.
Letter
Print menu
Print selection
Print all images
DPOF printing
Paper size
Print selection
Reference Section
Choose the pictures (up to a maximum of 99)
Print selection
10
and number of copies (up to nine per picture).
• Press the multi selector J or K to choose the
1
1
2
3
pictures, and press H or I to set the number
of copies for each.
• Pictures selected for printing can be
recognized by the check mark icon and the
Back
numeral indicating the number of copies to be
printed. A check mark is not displayed with
pictures for which no copies have been specified and these pictures are not
printed.
• Rotate the zoom control toward g (i) to switch to full-frame playback mode,
or f (h) to switch to 12 thumbnail display.
• Press the k button when setting is complete.
• When the menu shown on the right is
Print selection
displayed, choose Start print and press the
k button to start printing.
010 prints
• Choose Cancel and press the k button to
return to the print menu.
Start print
Cancel
E29
Connecting the Camera to a Printer (Direct Print)
Print all images
All pictures stored in the internal memory or on
the memory card are printed one per each.
• When the menu shown on the right is
displayed, choose Start print and press the
k button to start printing.
• Choose Cancel and press the k button to
return to the print menu.
Print all images
018 prints
Start print
Cancel
DPOF printing
Pictures for which a print order was created in
Print order option (E55) can be printed.
• When the menu shown on the right is
displayed, choose Start print and press the
k button to start printing.
• Choose Cancel and press the k button to
return to the print menu.
• To view the current print order, choose View
images and press the k button. To print
pictures, press the k button again.
DPOF printing
010 prints
Start print
View images
Cancel
View images
10
Back
Reference Section
5
Printing starts.
• The monitor display returns to that shown in step 2
when printing is complete.
• To cancel before all copies have been printed, press
the k button.
Printing
002 / 010
Cancel
Current print/total
number of prints
C
Paper Size
The camera supports the following paper sizes: Default (the default paper size for the current
printer), 3.5×5 in., 5×7 in., 100×150 mm, 4×6 in., 8×10 in., Letter, A3, and A4. Only sizes
supported by the current printer are displayed.
E30
Editing Movies
Extracting Only the Desired Portions of the Movie
The desired portions of a recorded movie can be saved as a separate file.
1
Play back the movie to be edited and pause at the start point of the
portion that is to be extracted (A100).
2
Use the multi selector J or K to choose I
on the playback control, and press the k
button.
• The movie editing screen is displayed.
7m42s
3
4
Press H or I to choose J (Choose start
point) on the editing playback control.
Choose start point
• Rotate the multi selector or press J or K to adjust the
start position.
• To cancel, press H or I to choose L (Back) and press
the k button.
8m48s
Press H or I to choose K (Choose end point).
Choose end point
Reference Section
• Rotate the multi selector or press J or K to move the
end point at the right end to the end position of the
required section.
• To check the playback of the movie in the specified
range before saving it, choose c (Preview) and press
5m52s
the k button. During preview playback, the volume can
be adjusted with the zoom control g/f. Use the multi
selector to fast forward or rewind. To stop the preview playback, press the k button
again.
5
After finishing the settings, press H or I to choose m (Save) and press
the k button.
6
Choose Yes and press the k button.
• The edited movie is saved.
• To cancel the saving, choose No.
Save OK?
Yes
No
E31
Editing Movies
B
Notes on Editing Movies
• Use a fully charged battery to prevent the camera from turning off during editing. When the
battery level is B, movie editing is not possible.
• Once a movie is created through editing, it cannot be used again for extracting a movie. To extract
another range, select and edit the original movie.
• Because the edited movies are extracted in 1-second units, they may vary slightly from the set start
point and end point. Sections shorter than two seconds cannot be extracted.
• Editing functions are not available when there is not enough free space in the internal memory or
on the memory card.
C
More Information
See “File and Folder Names” (E98) for more information.
Saving a Frame from a Movie as a Still Picture
A frame from a recorded movie can be extracted and saved as a still picture.
• Pause a movie and display the frame to be extracted
(A100).
• Choose H on the playback control with the multi
selector J or K and press the k button.
7m42s
7m42
Reference Section
• When the confirmation dialog is displayed, choose
Yes and press the k button to save. To cancel the
Copy this frame as a still image?
saving, choose No.
• The still picture is saved with Normal as the image
quality. The image size is determined by the type
Yes
No
(image size) (E64) of the original movie.
For example, a still picture saved from a movie
recorded with d HD 1080pP (1920×1080) is i (1920 × 1080 pixels).
E32
Shooting Menu (j, k, l or m Mode)
Image Quality and Image Size
To set the image quality and image size, see “Changing the Image Quality and
Image Size” (A77).
Picture Control (COOLPIX Picture Control)
Rotate the mode dial to j, k, l or m M d button M j, k, l or m tab (A13)
M Picture Control
Change the settings for image recording according to the shooting scene or your
preferences. Sharpness, contrast and saturation can be adjusted in detail.
Types of COOLPIX Picture Control
Description
Option
Standard processing for balanced results. Recommended for
most situations.
c
Neutral
Minimal processing for natural results. Choose for pictures that
will later be extensively processed or retouched.
d
Vivid
Pictures are enhanced for a vivid, photoprint effect. Choose for
pictures that emphasize primary colors, such as blue, red, and
green.
e
Monochrome
Take monochrome photographs such as in black-and-white or
sepia.
f
Custom 1*
Change to the setting for Custom 1 in COOLPIX Custom Picture
Control.
g
Custom 2*
Change to the setting for Custom 2 in COOLPIX Custom Picture
Control.
Reference Section
b
Standard
(default
setting)
* Only displayed when the setting customized in Custom Picture Control (E37) has been
registered.
The icon for the current setting other than Standard is displayed on the monitor
(A8).
B
Notes on COOLPIX Picture Control
• The COOLPIX Picture Control feature of the COOLPIX P510 cannot be used with other makes of
cameras, Capture NX, Capture NX 2 and ViewNX 2 Picture Control feature.
• This feature may not be used in combination with certain features. See “Features That Cannot Be
Used Simultaneously” (A80) for more information.
E33
Shooting Menu (j, k, l or m Mode)
Customizing Existing COOLPIX Picture Controls: Quick Adjust and
Manual Adjust
COOLPIX Picture Control can be customized using Quick adjust, which allows for
balanced adjustment of sharpness, contrast, saturation and other image editing
components, or manual adjust, which allows for detailed adjusting of the
components individually.
1
Use the multi selector to choose the type of
COOLPIX Picture Control, and press the k
button.
Picture Control
Standard
Neutral
Vivid
Monochrome
View grid
2
Reference Section
C
Press H or I to highlight the desired setting
(E35) and press J or K to choose a value.
Standard
• Press the k button to set the value.
• When COOLPIX Picture Controls are modified from the
default settings, an asterisk (*) is displayed after the
options in the Picture Control Setting menu.
• To change the values to the default setting, select
Reset and press the k button.
Reset
Back
Quick adjust
Image sharpening
Contrast
Saturation
View Grid of COOLPIX Picture Control
When the zoom control is rotated toward g (i) while the screen in
step 1 of the above procedure is displayed, the contrast and
saturation are displayed using a grid. The vertical axis indicates the
contrast level, and the horizontal axis indicates the saturation.
Rotate the zoom control toward g (i) again to return to the
previous screen.
The COOLPIX Picture Control grid displays the current and default
Back
Standard
settings in relation to the other COOLPIX Picture Controls.
• Rotate the multi selector to change to other COOLPIX Picture Controls.
• Press the k button to display the COOLPIX Picture Control Setting screen (step 2 above).
• For Monochrome, the grid is displayed for contrast only.
• The grid is also displayed when adjusting Contrast or Saturation with manual adjustment.
E34
Shooting Menu (j, k, l or m Mode)
Types of Quick Adjust and Manual Adjust
Option
Description
Image sharpening
Control how much outlines are sharpened during shooting.
Choose A (auto) to adjust sharpening automatically, or choose
from seven levels of adjustment between 0 (no sharpening) and
6.
The higher the number, the sharper the image, and the lower
the number, the softer the image.
The default setting is 3 for Standard or Monochrome, 2 for
Neutral and 4 for Vivid.
Contrast
Control the contrast. Choose A (auto) to adjust the contrast
automatically according to the type of scene, or choose from
seven levels of adjustment between -3 and +3.
– makes it into an image with a softer appearance, and + gives it
a harder appearance. Choose lower values to prevent highlights
in portrait subjects from being “washed out” in direct sunlight,
higher values to preserve detail in misty landscapes and other
low-contrast subjects.
The default setting is 0.
Saturation 2
Control the vividness of colors. Choose A (auto) to adjust
saturation automatically according to the type of scene, or seven
levels of adjustment can be done by choosing from values
between -3 and +3.
Setting to the – side reduces the vividness, and setting to the +
side increases the vividness.
The default setting is 0.
Filter effects 3
Simulate the effect of color filters on monochrome photographs.
Choose from OFF (the default setting), Y (yellow), O (orange), R
(red), and G (green).
Y, O, R:
Enhance contrast. Can be used to tone down the brightness of
the sky in landscape photographs. The contrast is strengthened
in the order Y ➝ O ➝ R.
G:
Soften skin tones. Suitable for portraits.
Reference Section
Quick adjust 1
Adjust the sharpness, contrast and saturation levels
automatically. Five levels of adjustment are available from -2 to
+2.
Choose from options between -2 and +2 to reduce or
emphasize the effect of the selected COOLPIX Picture Control.
The default setting is 0.
E35
Shooting Menu (j, k, l or m Mode)
Option
Toning 3
1
2
3
Reference Section
B
Description
Control the tint used in monochrome photographs from B&W
(black-and-white, the default setting), Sepia, and Cyanotype
(blue-tinted monochrome).
Pressing the rotary multi selector I when Sepia or Cyanotype
is selected enables you to choose from seven levels of gradation.
Press J or K to adjust the saturation.
Quick adjust is not available in Neutral, Monochrome, Custom 1 and Custom 2.
The values set manually are disabled if quick adjust is used after manual setting.
Not displayed for Monochrome.
Only displayed for Monochrome.
Note on Image Sharpening
The effects of Image sharpening cannot be previewed on the monitor during shooting. Check the
results in playback mode.
B
Note on Contrast
When Active D-Lighting (E53) is set to settings other than Off, the J mark is displayed for
Contrast and Contrast cannot be adjusted.
B
Contrast, Saturation and A (Auto)
• Results for contrast and saturation vary with the exposure, and the position and size of the subject
in the frame.
• The setting for the COOLPIX Picture Control which has A (auto) selected for either Contrast or
Saturation is displayed in green in the COOLPIX Picture Control grid.
C
Options that Can Be Adjusted in Custom 1 and Custom 2
The option of the original COOLPIX Picture Control can be adjusted if Custom 1 or Custom 2 is
selected.
E36
Shooting Menu (j, k, l or m Mode)
Custom Picture Control (COOLPIX Custom Picture Control)
Rotate the mode dial to j, k, l or m M d button M j, k, l or m tab (A13)
M Custom Picture Control
The picture editing options created by customizing COOLPIX Custom Picture
Controls can be registered up to two options. The registered options can be
displayed as Custom 1 and Custom 2 in COOLPIX Custom Picture Control.
Creating COOLPIX Custom Picture Controls
1
Use the multi selector to choose Edit and
save, and press the k button.
Custom Picture Control
Edit and save
Delete
2
Choose the original COOLPIX Picture Control (E34) to be edited, and
press the k button.
3
Press H or I to highlight the desired setting and press J or K to
choose a value (E34).
4
Choose the registration destination and press
the k button.
• The COOLPIX Custom Picture Control is registered.
• Custom 1 or Custom 2 can be selected from the
Picture Control and Custom Picture Control
selection screen after registration.
C
Save as
Custom 1
Custom 2
Reference Section
• The options are the same as those for adjusting the COOLPIX Picture Control.
• Press the k button to display the Save as screen.
• To change the values to the default setting, select Reset and press the k button.
Deleting COOLPIX Custom Picture Controls
Select Delete in step 1 of “Creating COOLPIX Custom Picture Controls” to delete a registered
Custom Picture Control.
E37
Shooting Menu (j, k, l or m Mode)
White Balance (Adjusting Hue)
Rotate the mode dial to j, k, l or m M d button M j, k, l or m tab (A13)
M White balance
The color of light reflected from an object varies with the color of the light source.
The human brain is able to adapt to changes in the color of the light source, with
the result that white objects appear white whether seen in the shade, direct
sunlight, or under incandescent lighting. Digital cameras can mimic this
adjustment of the human eye by processing images according to the color of the
light source. This is known as “white balance.” For natural colors, select a white
balance setting that matches the light source before shooting.
Although the default setting, Auto (normal), can be used under most types of
lighting, you can apply the white balance setting suited to a particular light source
to achieve more accurate results.
Option
Description
Auto (normal)
a1 (default
setting)
White balance is automatically adjusted to suit lighting
conditions. Best choice in most situations.
When set to Auto (warm lighting), the images are preserved
with warm colors if they are shot under an incandescent light
source. When using the flash, according to the brightness of the
flash, the images are adjusted to suitable white balance.
Reference Section
a2
Auto (warm
lighting)
b
Preset manual
Useful when shooting under unusual lighting. See “Using Preset
Manual” for more information (E39).
White balance adjusted for direct sunlight.
c
Daylight*
d
Incandescent* Use under incandescent lighting.
e
Fluorescent
(1 to 3)
Use under most types of fluorescent lighting. Choose one of 1
(white fluorescent), 2 (daylight white/neutral fluorescent) and 3
(daylight fluorescent).
f
Cloudy*
Use when taking pictures under overcast skies.
g
Flash*
Use with the flash.
* Fine adjustments in seven steps are available. Apply positive (+) to increase blue hue and
negative (–) to increase red hue.
The icon for the current setting other than Auto (normal) is displayed on the
monitor (A8).
B
Notes on White Balance
• At white-balance settings other than Auto (normal), Auto (warm lighting) or Flash, set the
flash mode to W (off) (A66).
• This feature may not be used in combination with certain features. See “Features That Cannot Be
Used Simultaneously” (A80) for more information.
E38
Shooting Menu (j, k, l or m Mode)
Using Preset Manual
Use when you want to make pictures taken under unusual lighting conditions (e.g.,
lamps with reddish-light) look as though they were shot in normal light.
Use the procedure below to measure the white balance value under the lighting
used during shooting.
1
Place a white or gray reference object under the lighting that will be
used during shooting.
2
Display the shooting menu (A60), use the
multi selector to set White balance to
b Preset manual, then press the k button.
• The lens extends to the zoom position for
measurement.
3
Choose Measure.
• To apply the most recently measured white balance
value, select Cancel and press the k button. The most
recently measured white balance value will be set
without re-measuring the value.
Frame a white or gray reference object in the
reference object frame.
Auto (normal)
Auto (warm lighting)
Preset manual
Daylight
Incandescent
Fluorescent
Cloudy
Preset manual
Cancel
Measure
Preset manual
Reference Section
4
White balance
Cancel
Measure
Reference object frame
5
Press the k button to measure the white balance value.
• The shutter is released and the new white balance preset value is set (no picture is
recorded).
B
Note on Preset Manual
The camera cannot measure a white balance value for when the flash fires. When shooting with the
flash, set White balance to Auto (normal), Auto (warm lighting) or Flash.
E39
Shooting Menu (j, k, l or m Mode)
Metering
Rotate the mode dial to j, k, l or m M d button M j, k, l or m tab (A13)
M Metering
The process of measuring the brightness of the subject to determine the exposure
is known as “metering.”
Use this option to choose how the camera meters exposure.
Option
G
Matrix (default
setting)
Description
The camera uses a wide area of the screen for metering.
This metering mode provides the appropriate exposure for a
variety of shooting conditions. Recommended for typical
shooting.
q Center-weighted
The camera meters the entire frame but assigns greatest weight
to the subject at the center of the frame. The classic metering for
portraits; it preserves background details while letting lighting
conditions at the center of the frame determine exposure. Can
be used with focus lock (A86) to meter off-center subjects.
r Spot
The camera meters the area shown by the circle in the center of
the frame. This can be used when the subject metering target is
lighter or darker than the background. Ensure that the subject is
within the area shown by the circle when shooting. Can be used
with focus lock (A86) to meter off-center subjects.
Reference Section
B
Notes on Metering
• When the digital zoom is in effect, Metering is set to Center-weighted or Spot.
• This feature may not be used in combination with certain features. See “Features That Cannot Be
Used Simultaneously” (A80) for more information.
C
Metering Area
When Center-weighted or Spot is selected for Metering, the metering range guide (A8) is
displayed (except when digital zoom is used).
E40
Shooting Menu (j, k, l or m Mode)
Continuous Shooting
Rotate the mode dial to j, k, l or m M d button M j, k, l or m tab (A13)
M Continuous
Change the settings for continuous shooting and BSS (Best Shot Selector).
Option
U
k
m
Single (default setting)
Continuous H
Pictures are continuously shot at a rate of about seven
frames per second while the shutter-release button is
pressed all the way (when image quality is set to Normal
and image size is set to i 4608×3456). Shooting ends
when the shutter-release button is released, or five
pictures have been taken continuously.
Continuous L
Up to about 30 pictures are continuously shot at a rate of
about one frame per second while the shutter-release
button is pressed all the way (when image quality is set to
Normal and image size is set to i 4608×3456).
Pre-shooting cache
Pre-shooting cache makes it easy to capture perfect
moments, by saving images from before the shutterrelease button was pressed all the way. Pre-shooting
cache shooting begins when the shutter-release button is
pressed halfway, and shooting continues when the
shutter-release button is pressed all the way (E43).
• Frame rate: up to 15 fps
• Number of frames: up to 20 frames (including up to 5
frames captured in the pre-shooting cache)
Shooting ends when the shutter-release button is
released or when the maximum number of frames has
been shot.
The image quality is fixed at Normal and the image size is
fixed at C (2048 × 1536 pixels).
n Continuous H: 120 fps
Each time the shutter-release button is pressed all the
way, 60 frames are captured at a speed of about 1/125 s or
faster.
The image size is fixed at f (640 × 480 pixels).
j
Each time the shutter-release button is pressed all the
way, 60 frames are captured at a speed of about 1/60 s or
faster.
The image size is fixed at A (1280 × 960 pixels).
Continuous H: 60 fps
Reference Section
q
Description
One picture is shot each time the shutter-release button is
pressed.
E41
Shooting Menu (j, k, l or m Mode)
Option
D
Description
BSS is recommended for shooting under low lighting
without the flash, with the camera zoomed in, or in other
situations in which camera shake is likely to blur pictures.
BSS (Best Shot Selector)
Keep pressing the shutter-release button all the way, and
up to ten pictures are shot and the camera automatically
selects and saves only the sharpest picture in the series.
W
Multi-shot 16
Each time the shutter-release button
is pressed all the way, the camera
shoots 16 pictures at a rate of about
30 frames per second and arranges
them in a single picture.
• The image quality is fixed at Normal
and the image size is fixed at D (2560 × 1920 pixels).
• The digital zoom is not available.
X
Intvl timer shooting
The camera shoots still pictures automatically at the
specified interval (E43).
The icon for the current setting other than Single is displayed on the monitor (A8).
B
Notes on Continuous Shooting
Reference Section
• Focus, exposure and white balance are fixed at the values determined with the first shot in each series.
• The frame rate may become slower depending on the image quality, image size, memory card
type or shooting conditions.
• When ISO sensitivity (E45) is set to 3200 or Hi 1, the frame rate becomes slower.
• This feature may not be used in combination with certain features. See “Features That Cannot Be
Used Simultaneously” (A80) for more information.
B
Note on BSS
BSS is suited for shooting stationary subjects. BSS may not produce the desired results if the subject
moves or the composition changes.
B
Note on Multi-shot 16
Banding or variance in brightness or hue may occur in images that were captured under lighting
that flashes quickly at high speeds, such as fluorescent, mercury-vapor, or sodium-vapor lighting.
B
Notes on Continuous H
• It may take some time to save the images after shooting. The amount of time it takes to finish saving
the captured images depends on the number of images, the write speed of the memory card, etc.
• When ISO sensitivity increases, noise may appear in captured images.
• Accurate exposure may not be achieved (images may be overexposed) in images captured on
bright sunny days.
• Banding or variance in brightness or hue may occur in images that were captured under lighting
that flashes quickly, such as fluorescent, mercury-vapor, or sodium-vapor lighting.
E42
Shooting Menu (j, k, l or m Mode)
C
Pre-shooting Cache
When Pre-shooting cache is selected, shooting begins when the shutter-release button is pressed
halfway for 0.5 seconds or longer, and images captured before the shutter-release button is pressed
all the way are saved along with images captured after the shutter-release button is pressed all the
way. Up to five images can be saved in the pre-shooting cache.
The current pre-shooting cache setting is indicated by an icon when shooting (A8). The preshooting cache icon lights in green while the shutter-release button is pressed halfway.
Press down halfway
Press down fully
Images saved by
pressing halfway
Images saved by
pressing all the way
Interval Timer Shooting
Rotate the mode dial to j, k, l or m M d button M j, k, l or m tab (A13)
M Continuous
Reference Section
• If the number of exposures remaining is less than six, the pictures taken with the pre-shooting
cache are not recorded. Before shooting, check that there are six or more exposures remaining.
Choose from 30 s, 1 min, 5 min or 10 min.
1
Use the multi selector to select X Intvl timer
shooting for the Continuous setting, and
then press the k button.
Continuous
Multi-shot 16
Intvl timer shooting
E43
Shooting Menu (j, k, l or m Mode)
2
Choose the interval between each shot and
press the k button.
• The maximum amount of frames that can be taken
during interval timer shooting differs according to the
selected interval.
- 30 s: 600 images
- 1 min: 300 images
- 5 min: 60 images
- 10 min: 30 images
3
Intvl timer shooting
30 s
1 min
5 min
10 min
Press the d button.
• The camera returns to shooting screen.
4
Press the shutter-release button all the way to
shoot the first picture and start interval timer
shooting.
• The monitor is turned off and the power-on lamp
flashes between shots.
• The monitor reactivates automatically immediately
before the next picture is shot.
5
25m 0s
1/250
F5.6
600
Press the shutter-release button all the way again to finish shooting.
• Shooting finishes automatically if the internal memory or memory card becomes full,
or when the number of shot frames reaches the upper limit.
Reference Section
B
Notes on Interval Timer Shooting
• To prevent the camera from turning off unexpectedly during shooting, use a fully charged battery.
• If the AC Adapter EH-62A (available separately) (E100) is used, COOLPIX P510 can be powered
from an electrical outlet. Do not use any other make or model of AC adapter. Failure to observe this
precaution could result in overheating or damage to the camera.
• Do not rotate the mode dial to a different setting while performing interval timer shooting.
C
More Information
See “File and Folder Names” (E98) for more information.
E44
Shooting Menu (j, k, l or m Mode)
ISO Sensitivity
Rotate the mode dial to j, k, l or m M d button M j, k, l or m tab (A13)
M ISO sensitivity
The higher the ISO sensitivity, the less light needed for taking pictures.
The higher the ISO sensitivity, the darker the subject that can be shot. Additionally,
even with subjects of similar brightness, pictures can be taken at faster shutter speeds,
and blurring caused by camera shake and subject movement can be reduced.
• Setting the ISO sensitivity to a high level is effective when shooting dark
subjects, not using the flash, shooting at the telephoto zoom position and
similar situations, but the pictures taken may be slightly grainy.
Types of ISO Sensitivity
Option
ISO sensitivity
Reference Section
Minimum
shutter speed
Description
• Auto (default setting): The sensitivity is ISO 100 in bright places; in
dark places the camera automatically raises the sensitivity to a
maximum of ISO 1600.
• Fixed range auto: Choose the range in which the camera
automatically adjusts ISO sensitivity from ISO 100-400 (default
setting) and ISO 100-800. The camera does not raise sensitivity
beyond the maximum value in the selected range. Set the maximum
value for ISO sensitivity to control “grain” that appears in images.
• 100, 200, 400, 800, 1600, 3200, Hi 1 (equivalent to ISO 6400):
ISO sensitivity is locked at the specified value.
When the shooting mode is j or l and ISO sensitivity is set to Auto
or Fixed range auto, the shutter speed at which the ISO sensitivity
automatic control starts to function (1/125 to one second) can be set.
The default setting is None. If the exposure is insufficient with the
shutter speed that is set here, the ISO sensitivity is increased
automatically to obtain the correct exposure. If the exposure is still
insufficient even after the ISO sensitivity is increased, the shutter speed
slows down.
The icon for the current setting is displayed on the monitor during shooting
(A8).
• When Auto is selected, the E icon is not displayed at ISO 100, but is displayed
if the ISO sensitivity automatically increases to higher than 100 (A30).
• When Fixed range auto is selected, the U icon and the maximum ISO
sensitivity value are displayed.
B
Notes on ISO Sensitivity
• In m (Manual) mode, ISO sensitivity is fixed at ISO 100 if Auto or Fixed range auto is selected.
• This feature may not be used in combination with certain features. See “Features That Cannot Be
Used Simultaneously” (A80) for more information.
E45
Shooting Menu (j, k, l or m Mode)
Exposure Bracketing
Rotate the mode dial to j, k or l M d button M j, k or l tab (A13)
M Exposure bracketing
The exposure (brightness) can be changed automatically during continuous
shooting. This is effective for shooting when it is difficult to adjust the picture
brightness.
Option
Description
±0.3
Camera varies exposure by 0, –0.3, and +0.3 over next three shots. The
three shots are taken in sequence when the shutter-release button is
pressed all the way.
±0.7
Camera varies exposure by 0, –0.7, and +0.7 over next three shots. The
three shots are taken in sequence when the shutter-release button is
pressed all the way.
±1.0
Camera varies exposure by 0, –1.0, and +1.0 over next three shots. The
three shots are taken in sequence when the shutter-release button is
pressed all the way.
Off (default
setting)
Exposure bracketing is not performed.
Reference Section
When exposure bracketing is enabled, the current setting is displayed during
shooting (A8). When Off is selected, an icon for the current setting is not
displayed.
B
Notes on Exposure Bracketing
• Exposure bracketing is not available in m (Manual) mode.
• When exposure compensation (A74) and ±0.3, ±0.7 or ±1.0 in Exposure bracketing are set
simultaneously, the combined exposure compensation values are applied.
• This feature cannot be used simultaneously with certain features. See “Features That Cannot Be
Used Simultaneously” (A80) for more information.
E46
Shooting Menu (j, k, l or m Mode)
AF Area Mode
Rotate the mode dial to j, k, l or m M d button M j, k, l or m tab (A13)
M AF area mode
You can set how the focus area is determined for autofocus.
Option
a Face priority
Auto
(default setting)
The camera automatically selects
the focus areas (up to nine) that
contain the subject closest to the
camera.
Press the shutter-release button
halfway to activate the focus area.
When the shutter-release button is
pressed halfway, the focus area
selected by the camera is
displayed on the monitor (up to
nine areas).
25m 0s
1/250
F5.6
Focus areas
840
Reference Section
w
Description
The camera automatically detects
and focuses on a face (see “Using
Face Detection” (A85) for more
information).
If the camera detects multiple
25m 0s
faces, the camera focuses on the
840
1/250 F5.6
face closest to the camera.
When non-human subjects are
Focus area
photographed, or a subject with
which no face can be detected is
framed, AF area mode is set to Auto. The camera automatically
selects the focus areas (up to nine) that contain the subject
closest to the camera.
E47
Shooting Menu (j, k, l or m Mode)
Option
x Manual
y Center
Description
Choose manually the focus position
from 99 areas in the screen. This
option is suited to situations in
which the intended subject is
relatively still and not positioned at
the center of the frame.
Rotate the multi selector or press
H, I, J or K to move the focus
Focus area
area to where the subject is, and
Selectable areas
take a picture.
• To adjust the following settings,
press the k button to temporarily cancel focus area selection,
and then adjust each setting.
- Flash mode, focus mode, self-timer or exposure
compensation
To return to the focus area selection screen, press the k
button again.
The camera focuses on the subject
at the center of the frame.
The focus area is always displayed
at the center of the frame.
25m 0s
1/250
F5.6
Focus area
Reference Section
s Subject tracking
E48
Subject tracking begins once you
select a subject to be focused on,
and the focus area will move and
follow the subject. See “Using
Subject Tracking” (E50).
End
840
Shooting Menu (j, k, l or m Mode)
Option
M Target finding AF
Description
When the camera detects the
main subject, it focuses on that
subject.
See “Using the Target Finding AF”
(A84) for more information.
1/250
F5.6
AF areas
Reference Section
B
Notes on AF Area Mode
• When the digital zoom is in effect, the camera focuses on the subject at the center of the frame
regardless of the applied AF area mode option.
• In some rare cases of shooting subjects for which autofocus does not perform as expected (A33),
the subject may not be in focus.
• This feature may not be used in combination with certain features. See “Features That Cannot Be
Used Simultaneously” (A80) for more information.
• If the camera does not focus on the desired subject when using a feature that selects and focuses
on the subject, such as Target finding AF, set AF area mode to Manual or Center and align the
focus area with the desired subject. You can also try using focus lock (A86).
E49
Shooting Menu (j, k, l or m Mode)
Using Subject Tracking
Rotate the mode dial to j, k, l or m M d button M j, k, l or m tab (A13)
M AF area mode
Choose this mode to shoot moving subjects. Subject tracking begins once you
select a subject to be focused on, and the focus area will move and follow the
subject.
1
Rotate the multi selector to select s Subject
tracking, and press the k button.
• Press the d button after changing the settings and
return to the shooting screen.
2
Start
1/250
F5.6
Reference Section
End
Press the shutter-release button all the way to
take the picture.
• If the camera focuses on the focus area when the
shutter-release button is pressed halfway, the focus
area display lights in green and the focus is locked.
• If the shutter-release button is pressed halfway while
the focus area is not displayed, the camera focuses the
subject at the center of the frame.
E50
Face priority
Auto
Manual
Center
Subject tracking
Target finding AF
Frame the subject at the center of the border,
and press the k button.
• The subject is registered.
• When the camera is unable to focus on the subject, the
border lights in red. Change the composition and try
again.
• Once the subject is registered, it is framed by a yellow
focus area display, and subject tracking begins.
• Press the k button to cancel the registration of the
subject.
• If the camera loses sight of the subject, the focus area
display disappears; register the subject again.
3
AF area mode
1/250
F5.6
25m 0s
840
Shooting Menu (j, k, l or m Mode)
B
Notes on Subject Tracking
• The digital zoom is not available.
• Set the zoom position, flash mode, focus mode, or menu settings before registering a subject. If
any of these are changed after a subject is registered, the subject will be canceled.
• During certain conditions, such as when the subject is moving quickly, when there is a large
amount of camera shake, or when there are multiple subjects that look alike, the camera may not
be able to register or track a subject, or the camera may track a different subject. Additionally, the
subject may not be tracked properly depending on factors such as the subject’s size and
brightness.
• In some rare cases of shooting subjects for which autofocus does not perform as expected (A33),
the subject may not be in focus despite the fact that the focus area lights in green. If you cannot
focus, change the AF area mode to Manual or Center and try shooting with focus lock (A86)
by refocusing on another subject at the same distance.
• This feature may not be used in combination with certain features. See “Features That Cannot Be
Used Simultaneously” (A80) for more information.
Autofocus Mode
Rotate the mode dial to j, k, l or m M d button M j, k, l or m tab (A13)
M Autofocus mode
Choose how the camera focuses.
Option
Description
The camera focuses only when the shutter-release button is
pressed halfway.
B Full-time AF
The camera focuses continuously until the shutter-release button
is pressed halfway. Use with moving subjects. A sound will be
heard while the camera focuses.
B
Reference Section
Single AF
A (default
setting)
Note on AF mode
This feature may not be used in combination with certain features. See “Features That Cannot Be
Used Simultaneously” (A80) for more information.
C
Autofocus Mode for Movie Recording
Autofocus mode for movie recording can be set with Autofocus mode (E68) in the movie menu.
E51
Shooting Menu (j, k, l or m Mode)
Flash Exp. Comp.
Rotate the mode dial to j, k, l or m M d button M j, k, l or m tab (A13)
M Flash exp. comp.
Flash exp. comp. option is used to adjust the flash output. Use this option when the
flash is too bright or too dark.
Option
Description
+0.3 to +2.0
The flash output is increased from +0.3 to +2.0 EV, in increments of 1/3
EV, to make the main subject of the frame appear brighter.
0.0 (default
setting)
The flash output is not adjusted.
-0.3 to -2.0
The flash output is reduced from –0.3 to –2.0 EV, in increments of 1/3
EV, to prevent unwanted highlights or reflections.
The icon for the current setting other than 0.0 is displayed on the monitor (A8).
Noise Reduction Filter
Rotate the mode dial to j, k, l or m M d button M j, k, l or m tab (A13)
M Noise reduction filter
Reference Section
Set the strength of the noise reduction function that is normally performed when
recording the picture.
Option
Description
Perform noise reduction at a level higher than the standard
strength.
e
High
M
Normal (default
Perform noise reduction at the standard strength.
setting)
l
Low
Perform noise reduction at a level lower than the standard
strength.
Noise reduction filter setting can be confirmed on the monitor when recording a
picture (A8).
E52
Shooting Menu (j, k, l or m Mode)
Active D-Lighting
Rotate the mode dial to j, k, l or m M d button M j, k, l or m tab (A13)
M Active D-Lighting
“Active D-Lighting” preserves details in highlights and shadows, creating
photographs with natural contrast. The image taken reproduces the contrast
effect that is seen with the naked eye. This is particularly effective for shooting
scenes with high contrast, such as brightly lit outdoor scenery from a dark room or
shaded subjects at a sunny seaside.
Option
Description
a
b
c
High
Normal
Low
Set the level of the Active D-Lighting effect that is applied during
shooting.
k
Off (default
setting)
Active D-Lighting is not applied.
The icon for the current setting other than Off is displayed on the monitor (A8).
B
Notes on Active D-Lighting
B
Active D-Lighting Versus D-Lighting
The Active D-Lighting option in the shooting menu reduces exposure before shooting to optimize
the dynamic range. The D-Lighting (E17) option in the playback menu optimizes dynamic range
in pictures taken.
Reference Section
• Additional time is required to record images when shooting using Active D-Lighting.
• The exposure is reduced in comparison to shooting with Active D-Lighting set to Off. To ensure
that the gradation is appropriate, adjustments of the highlighted areas, shadow areas and midtones are made before recording.
• This feature may not be used in combination with certain features. See “Features That Cannot Be
Used Simultaneously” (A80) for more information.
Save User Settings/Reset User Settings
See “Saving Settings in M Mode” (A64) for more information about Save User
Settings/Reset User Settings.
E53
Shooting Menu (j, k, l or m Mode)
Zoom Memory
Rotate the mode dial to j, k, l or m M d button M j, k, l or m tab (A13)
M Zoom memory
Option
Description
On
When the zoom control is operated, the camera changes in steps
to the focal length (equivalent to 35mm [135] format of angle of
view) of the zoom lens that is set in advance. The following
settings are available: 24 mm, 28 mm, 35 mm, 50 mm, 85 mm,
105 mm, 135 mm, 200 mm, 300 mm, 400 mm, 500 mm,
600 mm, 800 mm and 1000 mm.
• Choose the focal length with the multi selector, and then press
the k button to set the check box to On [w] or Off.
• Multiple focal lengths can be chosen.
• The default setting is On [w] for all the check boxes.
• To finish the setting, press the multi selector K.
• The zoom position set in the Startup zoom position is
automatically set to On [w].
Off (default setting)
Even if zoom control is operated, the zoom position is not
changed with each focal length.
B
Notes on Zoom Operation
Reference Section
• The changed focal length is the closest to that before the operation. To change the zoom position
to the next focal length level, release the zoom control and then operate it again.
• Set Zoom memory to Off when using the digital zoom.
Startup Zoom Position
Rotate the mode dial to j, k, l or m M d button M j, k, l or m tab (A13)
M Startup zoom position
When the camera is turned on, the zoom position moves to the focal length
(equivalent to 35mm [135] format of angle of view) of the zoom lens that is set in
advance.
The following settings are available: 24 mm (default setting), 28 mm, 35 mm,
50 mm, 85 mm, 105 mm and 135 mm.
E54
The Playback Menu
For more information about image editing functions; (Quick retouch, DLighting, Skin softening, Filter effects, Small picture and Black border), see
“Editing Still Images” (E15).
a Print Order (Creating a DPOF Print Order)
Press the c button (Playback mode) M d button (A13) M a Print order
If you choose to use one of the following methods to print pictures that are stored
on a memory card, the pictures to print and the number of copies can be set in
advance on the memory card.
• Printing with a DPOF-compatible (F18) printer that is equipped with a card
slot.
• Ordering the prints to a digital photo lab that has a DPOF service.
• Printing by connecting the camera to a PictBridge-compatible (F18) printer
(E25). (When the memory card is removed from the camera, the print order
can also be performed for the pictures stored on the internal memory.)
1
Choose the pictures (up to a maximum of 99)
and number of copies (up to nine per picture).
Print order
Select images
Delete print order
Print selection
1
1
3
• Rotate the multi selector or press J or K to choose the
pictures, and press H or I to set the number of copies
for each.
• Pictures selected for printing can be recognized by the
Back
check mark icon and the numeral indicating the
number of copies to be printed. If no copies have been
specified for images, the selection is canceled.
• Rotate the zoom control toward g (i) to switch to full frame playback mode, or f
(h) to switch to 12 thumbnail display.
• Press the k button when setting is complete.
Reference Section
2
Use the multi selector to choose Select
images, and press the k button.
E55
The Playback Menu
3
Choose whether or not to also print shooting
date and shooting information.
• Choose Date and press the k button to print the
shooting date on all pictures in the print order.
• Choose Info and press the k button to print shooting
information (shutter speed and aperture value) on all
pictures in the print order.
• Choose Done and press the k button to complete the
print order.
Pictures with the print orders are recognized by the w
icon displayed in playback mode.
Print order
Done
Date
Info
15/05/2012 15:30
0004.JPG
4/ 132
B
Notes on Printing Shooting Date and Shooting Information
Reference Section
When the Date and Info options are enabled in the print order menu, shooting date and shooting
information can be printed on pictures when a DPOF-compatible (F18) printer which supports
printing of shooting date and shooting information is used.
• Shooting information cannot be printed when the camera is connected directly to a printer, via
the included USB cable, for DPOF printing (E30).
• Date and Info are reset each time the Print order menu is displayed.
• The date and time printed on the picture are the same as those set
on the camera when the picture was taken. The date and time
printed using this option are not affected if the camera’s Time
zone and date setting is changed from the setup menu after the
pictures are taken.
C
15/05/2012
Deleting All Print Orders
In step 1 of the print order procedure (E55), choose Delete print order and press the k button
to delete the print orders for all pictures.
C
Print Date
The shooting date and time can be imprinted on pictures at the time of shooting by using Print
date (E79) in the setup menu. This information can be printed even from printers that do not
support printing of the date and time. Only the date and time of print date on the pictures are
printed, even if Print order is enabled with the date selected in the print order screen.
C
More Information
See “Printing Images of Size 1:1” (A79) for more information.
E56
The Playback Menu
b Slide Show
Press the c button (Playback mode) M d button (A13) M b Slide show
View pictures stored in the internal memory or on a memory card in an automatic
slide show.
1
Use the multi selector to choose Start, and
press the k button.
• To change the interval between pictures, choose
Frame intvl, and press the k button, and then select
the desired interval time before choosing Start.
• To repeat the slide show automatically, enable Loop
and press the k button before choosing Start. The
check mark (w) is added to the loop option when
enabled.
2
Slide show
Pause
Start
Frame intvl
Loop
3s
The slide show begins.
• Press the multi selector K to display the next picture, or
J to display the previous picture. Press and hold K to
fast forward, or J to rewind.
• To exit partway or pause, press the k button.
Choose End or Restart.
Reference Section
3
• After the last frame is played back or during playback
pause, the screen shown on the right is displayed.
Choose G and press the k button to return to step 1.
Choose F to play the slide show again.
B
Notes on Slide Shows
• Only the first frame of movies (A100) included in slide shows is displayed.
• For sequences (E13) whose sequence display options are set to Key picture only, only the key
picture is displayed.
• Images captured using easy panorama are displayed full-frame when played in a slide show. They
do not scroll.
• Slide shows play for a maximum of about 30 minutes, even when Loop is selected (E84).
E57
The Playback Menu
d Protect
Press the c button (Playback mode) M d button (A13) M d Protect
Protect selected pictures from accidental deletion.
In the image selection screen, choose a picture and set or cancel protection. See
“The Image Selection Screen” (E59) for more information.
Note, however, that formatting the camera’s internal memory or the memory card
(E85) permanently erases the protected files.
Protected pictures are recognized by the s icon in playback mode (A10).
Reference Section
E58
The Playback Menu
The Image Selection Screen
The image selection screen is displayed in the following menus.
Only one image can be selected for some menu items, while for other menu items,
multiple images can be selected.
Functions for which only one image can be Functions for which multiple images can be
selected
selected
• Playback menu:
Rotate image (E60),
Choose key picture (E63)
• Setup menu:
Select an image in Welcome screen
(E74)
• Playback menu:
Select images in Print order (E55),
Protect (E58),
Selected images in Copy (E62)
• Erase selected images in Delete (A36)
Follow the procedure described below to select images.
1
Rotate the multi selector, or press J or K to
choose the desired image.
• Rotate the zoom control toward g (i) to switch to fullframe playback mode, or f (h) to switch to 12
thumbnail display.
• For functions for which only one image is selected,
proceed to step 3.
2
Press H or I to select ON or OFF (or the
number of copies).
Erase selected images
Back
ON/OFF
Erase selected images
Back
3
ON/OFF
Press the k button to apply the image selection.
Reference Section
• When ON is selected, a check mark (y) is displayed
with the image. Repeat steps 1 and 2 to select
additional images.
• With selections such as Selected images, the confirmation dialog is displayed.
Follow the instructions on the screen.
E59
The Playback Menu
f Rotate Image
Press the c button (Playback mode) M d button (A13) M f Rotate image
Change the orientation of pictures played back in the camera’s monitor after
shooting. Still pictures can be rotated 90° clockwise or counterclockwise.
Pictures that were recorded in the “tall” orientation can be rotated up to 180° in
either direction.
Select a picture in the picture selection screen (E59) to display the rotate image
screen. Rotate the multi selector, or press J or K to rotate the picture 90°.
Rotate image
Back
Rotate image
Rotate
Rotated 90°
counterclockwise
Back
Rotate image
Rotate
Back
Rotate
Rotated 90°
clockwise
Press the k button to set the orientation displayed and save the orientation data
with the picture.
Reference Section
B
Notes on Image Rotation
• Images captured with cameras other than COOLPIX P510 cannot be rotated.
• Images captured using 3D photography cannot be rotated.
• While only the key picture of a sequence is displayed, images cannot be rotated. Apply the setting
after displaying individual images (E13, E63).
E60
The Playback Menu
E Voice Memo
Press the c button (Playback mode) M Select a picture M d button (A13)
M E Voice memo
Use the camera’s microphone to record voice memos for pictures.
• The recording screen is displayed for a picture without voice memo, while the voice memo
playback screen is displayed for a picture with voice memo (a picture marked with p in
full-frame playback mode).
Recording Voice Memos
• Voice memo can be recorded for up to about 20 seconds
while the k button is pressed.
• Do not touch the microphone during recording.
• During recording, o and p flash on the monitor.
• When recording ends, the voice memo playback screen is
displayed.
17s
Playing Voice Memos
Pictures for which voice memos have been recorded are
indicated by p in full-frame playback mode.
Deleting Voice Memos
Press the l button on the voice memo playback screen.
Press the multi selector H or I to select Yes and press
the k button to delete only the voice memo.
File will be deleted. OK?
Reference Section
• Press the k button to play back a voice memo. To end
playback, press the k button again.
• Rotate the zoom control toward g or f during playback to
12s
adjust playback volume.
• Press the multi selector J before or after playing a voice
memo to return to the playback menu. Press the d button to exit the playback menu.
Yes
No
B
Notes on Voice Memos
• When a picture with a voice memo attached is deleted, both the picture and its voice memo are
deleted.
• Voice memos cannot be recorded for a picture that already has a voice memo attached to it. The
current voice memo must be deleted before a new voice memo can be recorded.
• Voice memos cannot be attached to pictures taken with cameras other than COOLPIX P510.
• Voice memos of the images with the Protect setting (E58) cannot be deleted.
• Voice memos cannot be attached to pictures taken using easy panorama.
C
More Information
See “File and Folder Names” (E98) for more information.
E61
The Playback Menu
h Copy (Copy Between Internal Memory and Memory
Card)
Press the c button (Playback mode) M d button (A13) M h Copy
Copy pictures between the internal memory and a memory card.
1
Use the multi selector to select an option from
the copy screen, and press the k button.
• Camera to card: Copy pictures from the internal
memory to the memory card.
• Card to camera: Copy pictures from the memory card
to the internal memory.
2
Select a copy option and press the k button.
Copy
Camera to card
Card to camera
Camera to card
Selected images
• Selected images: Copy pictures selected from the
All images
image selection screen (E59). If a sequence for which
only a key picture is displayed is selected (E13), all
pictures in the displayed sequence are copied.
• All images: Copy all pictures. If a picture in a sequence
is selected, this option is not displayed.
• Current sequence: This option is displayed when a picture in a sequence has been
selected before displaying the playback menu. All pictures in the current sequence are
copied.
Reference Section
B
Notes on Copying Pictures
• JPEG-, MOV-, WAV-, and MPO-format files can be copied. Files recorded in any other format cannot
be copied.
• Voice memo (E61) attached to pictures and Protect setting (E58) are also copied with the
pictures.
• Pictures recorded with another make or model of camera or that have been modified on a
computer cannot be copied.
• Print order settings(E55) are not copied with the pictures.
• If Sequence display options (E63) is set to Key picture only and a picture in the sequence is
selected and the k button is pressed to display individual pictures (E13), only Card to camera
image copy is available.
E62
The Playback Menu
C
Message: “Memory contains no images.”
If there are no pictures stored on the memory card when playback mode is selected, the message, the
Memory contains no images., is displayed. Press the d button and select Copy from the
playback menu to copy the pictures stored in the camera's internal memory to the memory card.
C
More Information
See “File and Folder Names” (E98) for more information.
C Sequence Display Options
Press the c button (Playback mode) M d button (A13) M C Sequence display
options
Choose the method used to display a series of pictures shot continuously
(sequence, E13) when viewing them in full-frame playback mode (A34) or in
thumbnail playback mode (A35).
Settings are applied to all sequences, and the setting is saved in the camera’s
memory even if the camera is turned off.
Option
Description
Individual pictures Each picture in a sequence is displayed.
Return a sequence in which pictures are displayed individually to the
key picture only display.
x Choose Key Picture
Reference Section
Key picture only
(default setting)
Press the c button (Playback mode) M Select the desired sequence M d button
(A13) M x Choose key picture
When Sequence display options is set to Key picture only, the key picture
displayed in full-frame playback mode (A34) or thumbnail playback mode
(A35) can be set for each sequence of pictures.
• When changing this setting, before pressing d, first select the desired
sequence using full-frame playback mode or thumbnail playback mode.
• When the key picture selection screen is displayed, select a picture. See “The
Image Selection Screen” (E59) for more information.
E63
The Movie Menu
Movie Options
Display the shooting screen M d button M e (Movie) tab (A13) M Movie options
You can choose the type of movie to shoot.
The camera can record normal speed movies and HS (high speed) movies (E66),
which can be played back in slow motion or fast motion.
The larger the image size and bit rate, the higher the image quality; however, the
file size also becomes larger.
Normal Speed Movies
Option
d HD 1080pP
(1920×1080)
(default setting)
Description
Movies with an aspect ratio of 16:9 are recorded.
• Movie bitrate: 18.8 Mbps
• Frame rate: 30 frames per second
Movies with an aspect ratio of 16:9 are recorded.
e HD 1080p (1920×1080) • Movie bitrate: 12.6 Mbps
• Frame rate: 30 frames per second
Reference Section
f HD 720p (1280×720)
Movies with an aspect ratio of 16:9 are recorded.
• Movie bitrate: 8.4 Mbps
• Frame rate: 30 frames per second
p iFrame 540 (960×540)
Movies with an aspect ratio of 16:9 are recorded.
It is one of the formats supported by Apple Inc.
• Movie bitrate: 20.8 Mbps
• Frame rate: 30 frames per second
When using the camera’s internal memory for recording,
the movie recording may end unexpectedly depending on
the composition of the image. Using a memory card (Class
6 or higher) is recommended when recording important
movies.
g VGA (640×480)
Movies with an aspect ratio of 4:3 are recorded.
• Movie bitrate: 2.9 Mbps
• Frame rate: 30 frames per second
C
More Information
See “Maximum Movie Length” (A98) for more information.
E64
The Movie Menu
HS Movies
See “Recording Movies in Slow Motion and Fast Motion (HS Movie)” (E66) for
more information.
Option
Description
h HS 120 fps (640×480)
1/4-speed slow motion movies with an aspect ratio of 4:3 are
recorded.
• Max. movie length: 7 min 15 s (playback time: 29 min)
• Movie bitrate: 2.8 Mbps
• Frame rate: 120 frames per second
i HS 60 fps (1280×720)
1/2-speed slow motion movies with an aspect ratio of 16:9
are recorded.
• Max. movie length: 14 min 30 s* (playback time: 29 min)
• Movie bitrate: 8.3 Mbps
• Frame rate: 60 frames per second
2× speed fast motion movies with an aspect ratio of 16:9 are
recorded.
j HS 15 fps (1920×1080) • Max. movie length: 29 min (playback time: 14 min 30 s)
• Movie bitrate: 18.6 Mbps
• Frame rate: 15 frames per second
* The maximum movie length for a single movie is 30 seconds when it is saved in the internal
memory.
B
Reference Section
• The movie bitrate is the volume of movie data recorded per second. As a variable bitrate (VBR)
system has been adopted, the movie bitrate varies automatically according to the subject so that
more data is recorded per second for movies containing frequently moving subjects, thus
increasing movie file size.
Note on HS Movie Recording and Special Effects Mode Setting
h HS 120 fps (640×480) for Movie options cannot be selected when Soft, Nostalgic sepia,
or Painting is selected for the special effects shooting mode.
Even if you select h HS 120 fps (640×480) for other recording mode while Soft, Nostalgic
sepia, or Painting is selected for the special effects shooting mode, i HS 60 fps (1280×720) is
automatically selected for Movie options when the mode dial is rotated to u.
E65
The Movie Menu
Recording Movies in Slow Motion and Fast Motion (HS
Movie)
Display the shooting screen M d button M e (Movie) tab (A13) M Movie options
HS (high speed) movies can be recorded. Movies recorded using HS movie can be
played back in slow motion at 1/4 or 1/2 of normal playback speed, or played back
in fast motion at a speed two times faster than normal speed.
1
Use the multi selector to select HS movie
(E65), and press the k button.
• Press the d button after changing the settings and
return to the shooting screen.
2
Press the b (e movie-record) button to start
recording.
Movie options
HD 1080p (1920×1080)
HD 1080p (1920×1080)
HD 720p (1280×720)
iFrame 540 (960×540)
VGA (640×480)
HS 120 fps (640×480)
HS 60 fps (1280×720)
HS movie options
Reference Section
• The monitor is turned off for a moment, and then the HS
movie recording starts.
• The camera focuses at the center of the frame. Focus
areas are not displayed during recording.
• When recording movies with i HS 60 fps
(1280×720) or j HS 15 fps (1920×1080), monitor
display changes to an aspect ratio of 16:9.
• The maximum movie length display indicates the
maximum HS movie length.
3
E66
Press the b (e movie-record) button to end recording.
9s
The Movie Menu
B
Notes on HS Movie
• The sound is not recorded.
• Zoom position, focus, exposure and white balance are locked when the b (e movie-record)
button is pressed to start recording.
C
HS Movie
Recorded movies are played back at about 30 frames per second.
When Movie options (E64) in the movie menu is set to h HS 120 fps (640×480) or i
HS 60 fps (1280×720), movies that can be played back in slow motion can be recorded.
When set to j HS 15 fps (1920×1080), movies that can be played back in fast motion at a
speed two times faster than normal speed can be recorded.
Portions recorded at h HS 120 fps (640×480):
Movies are recorded for up to 7 minutes and 15 seconds at high speed, and are played back in slow
motion at a speed four times slower than normal speed.
Recording
15 s
Playback
1 min
Slow motion playback
(no sound)
Recording
Playback
2 min
Reference Section
Portions recorded at j HS 15 fps (1920×1080):
A movie of up to 29 minutes in length is recorded when shooting for the purpose of fast motion
playback. Movies are played back two times faster than normal speed.
1 min
Fast motion playback
(no sound)
E67
The Movie Menu
Autofocus Mode
Display the shooting screen M d button M e (Movie) tab (A13) M Autofocus
mode
Choose how the camera focuses when recording normal speed movies (E64).
Option
Description
A Single AF
(default
setting)
Lock on the focus when the b (e movie-record) button is pressed
to start recording. Select this option when the distance between the
camera and the subject remains fairly consistent.
B Full-time AF
The camera focuses continuously during movie recording.
Suitable for shooting when the distance of between the camera and
subject changes. The operation sound when the camera focuses may
be recorded. Setting to Single AF is recommended if the sound is
noticeable.
Reference Section
E68
GPS Setting Menu
GPS Settings
Press the d button M z (GPS setting) tab (A13) M GPS options
Option
Description
Record GPS data
When set to On, signals are being received from the GPS satellite, and
positioning starts (A102).
• The default setting is Off.
Synchronize
Signals from the GPS satellite are used to set the date and time of the
camera’s internal clock (only when Record GPS data in GPS
options of the GPS setting menu is set to On). Check the positioning
status before starting synchronize.
Update A-GPS file
A memory card is used to update the A-GPS (assist GPS) file. Using the
latest A-GPS file can shorten the time needed for tracking of the
position information.
See "Updating the A-GPS File" (E70) for more information.
Reference Section
B
Notes on Synchronize
• Date/time adjustment by Synchronize is set according to the time zone set in Time zone and
date (A26, E75) of the setup menu. Check the time zone before setting Synchronize.
• The date/time set using Synchronize is not as accurate as radio clocks. Use Time zone and date
in the setup menu to set the time if it is not accurate in Synchronize.
E69
GPS Setting Menu
Updating the A-GPS File
Download the latest A-GPS file from the website below, and use it to update the
file.
http://nikonimglib.com/agps2/index.html
• The A-GPS file for COOLPIX P510 is only available from the website above.
• To update the A-GPS file, set Record GPS data to Off. When On is selected, the
A-GPS file cannot be updated.
1
2
Download the latest A-GPS file to the computer from the website.
Use a card reader or other device to copy the downloaded file to the
“NCFL” folder of the memory card.
• The “NCFL” folder is located directly under the memory card root directory. If the
memory card does not have “NCFL” folder, create a new folder.
3
4
5
Insert the memory card containing the copied file into the camera.
6
Select Update A-GPS file, and update the file.
Turn on the camera.
Press the d button to display the GPS setting menu, and use the
multi selector to select GPS options.
• About two minutes are needed to update the A-GPS file.
Reference Section
B
Notes on Updating A-GPS File
• The A-GPS file is disabled when a position is determined for the first time after the camera is
purchased. The A-GPS file becomes active from the second operation for determining a location.
• The validity period of the A-GPS file can be checked on the update screen. If the validity period has
expired, it is displayed in gray.
• Once the validity period of the A-GPS file has expired, tracking of the position information will not
become faster. Updating of the A-GPS file before using the GPS feature is recommended.
E70
GPS Setting Menu
Create Log (Record the log of moving information)
Press the d button M z (GPS setting) tab (A13) M Create log
When log recording starts, the measured tracking information is recorded until a
preset time has elapsed at the interval set for Log interval.
• It is not possible to use the log data by simply recording it. To use the data,
select End log and save it in a memory card.
1
Use the multi selector to select Start log, and
press the k button.
• Before selecting Start log, select Log interval and
press the k button to select the intervals of log
recording. The default setting is 15 s.
2
Select the duration that the log will be
recorded, and press the k button.
• Log recording starts.
• The log data is recorded at the interval set for the Log
interval until the preset time is reached.
Create log
Start log
Log interval
End log
Start log
Log data for next 6 hours
Log data for next 12 hours
Log data for next 24 hours
• D is displayed on the screen during log recording.
1/125
3
When log recording is completed, select End
log in Create log in the GPS setting menu,
and press the k button.
F5.6
840
Reference Section
25m 0s
Create log
Start log
Log interval
End log
E71
GPS Setting Menu
4
Select Save log, and press the k button.
• The log data is saved to a memory card.
B
End log
Save log
Erase log
Notes on Log Recording
Reference Section
• If the date and time are not set, the log cannot be recorded.
• Use a fully charged battery to prevent the camera from turning off during log recording. When the
battery power becomes exhausted, loge recording ends.
• Log recording ends due to the operation below even when there is time remaining for log
recording.
- The USB cable is connected.
- The battery-chamber/memory card slot cover is opened or closed.
- Record GPS data in GPS options is set to Off (same as when Reset all is performed).
- The setting of the internal clock (time zone or date and time) is changed.
• If time for log recording still remains even when the camera is turned off, log recording is
continuously performed until the preset time has elapsed.
• The log data is temporarily stored in the camera. New logs cannot be recorded if the log data
remains in the camera. After recording log data, save it to a memory card.
• A maximum of 36 log data events can be recorded in one day.
• A maximum of 100 log data events can be saved to a single memory card.
C
To Erase Log Data
• To erase the log data that is temporarily stored in the camera, select Erase log in step 4.
• To erase the log data that is stored in the memory card, press the l button in View log (E73).
E72
GPS Setting Menu
View Log
Press the d button M z (GPS setting) tab (A13) M View log
Check or erase the log data stored in the memory card using Create log (E71).
1
2
Use the multi selector to select the log data to
be displayed, and press the k button.
View log
2012/05/26 [2]
2012/05/26 [1]
2012/05/20
2012/05/18
2012/05/15
Check the movement route.
• To erase the displayed log data, press the l button.
500m
2012/05/26[2]
Back
To Erase Log Data
C
Reference Section
Press the l button in step 1 to select either function.
• Selected log: The selected log data is erased.
• All logs: All log data stored on the memory card is erased.
Pictures Recorded during Log Recording
Your movement route and latitude-longitude coordinates of the
recording location can be checked by pressing the w button
while a picture is displayed in the full-frame playback mode.
Pressing the w button again switches the camera to full-frame
playback mode.
• When the pictures and log data are not stored on the same
memory card, your movement route cannot be displayed.
Shooting position
500m
2012/05/26[2]
NOO°OO'OO" EOO°OO'OO"
Latitude/Longitude
C
Log Data
Log data is NMEA format-compliant. However, display in any NMEA format-compliant software or on
any NMEA format-compliant camera is not guaranteed.
E73
The Setup Menu
Welcome Screen
Press the d button M z tab (A13) M Welcome screen
Choose whether or not to display the welcome screen on the monitor when the
camera is turned on.
Option
None
(default setting)
COOLPIX
Select an image
Reference Section
E74
Description
Display the shooting or playback screen without displaying the
welcome screen.
Display the welcome screen before displaying the shooting or
playback screen.
Select a picture taken to display as the welcome screen. Display the
image selection screen, choose an image (E59), and press the k
button to register it.
• Because the selected image is stored in the camera, the image
appears in the welcome screen even if the original image is deleted.
• The following pictures cannot be registered.
- Pictures taken with Image size (A78) of j 4608×2592,
O 1920×1080 , I 4608×3072 or H 3456×3456
- Pictures reduced to 320 × 240 or smaller using small picture
editing (E20) or crop (E22)
- Pictures taken with easy panorama
- Pictures taken using 3D photography
The Setup Menu
Time Zone and Date
Press the d button M z tab (A13) M Time zone and date
Option
Date and time
Date format
Time zone
Description
Set the camera clock to the current date and time.
Use the multi selector to set the date
Date and time
and time.
• Choose an item: Press K or J
D
M
Y
05
15
2012
(selected in the following order: D
(day) ➝ M (month) ➝ Y (year) ➝
15
10
hour ➝ minute).
The item can also be chosen by
Edit
rotating the multi selector.
• Set the contents: Press H or I. Date
and time can also be set by rotating the command dial.
• Finish setting: Choose minute and press the k button or K.
Choose the order in which the day, month, and year are displayed
(Year/Month/Day, Month/Day/Year or Day/Month/Year).
w Home time zone can be specified and daylight saving can be
enabled or disabled.
When x travel destination is registered, the time difference (E77)
from the w home time zone is automatically calculated and the local
date and time are recorded. Useful when traveling.
Reference Section
E75
The Setup Menu
Setting the Travel Destination Time Zone
1
Use the multi selector to choose Time zone,
and press the k button.
• The Time zone screen is displayed.
Time zone and date
15/05/2012 15:30
London, Casablanca
Date and time
Date format
Time zone
2
Choose x Travel destination and press the
k button.
• The date and time displayed on the monitor change
according to the region currently selected.
3
Press K.
Time zone
Tokyo, Seoul
15/05/2012 23:30
Home time zone
Travel destination
Time zone
• The time zone selection screen is displayed.
Tokyo, Seoul
15/05/2012 23:30
Home time zone
Travel destination
Reference Section
4
Press J or K to choose the travel destination
(Time zone).
• The time difference between home and the travel
destination is displayed.
• When using the camera in an area where daylight saving
time is in effect, turn on the daylight saving setting with
H. When set to on, the W icon is displayed on the top
of the monitor and the clock advances by one hour. To
turn off, press I.
• Press the k button to register the travel destination
time zone.
• While the travel destination time zone is selected, the
Z icon is displayed on the monitor when the camera is
in shooting mode.
C
Time difference
10:30
-5:00
EDT:
New York
Toronto
Lima
Back
Time zone
EDT:New York
Toronto, Lima
15/05/2012 10:30
Home time zone
Travel destination
w Home Time Zone
• To switch to the home time zone, choose w Home time zone in step 2 and press the k button.
• To change the home time zone, choose w Home time zone in step 2 and perform the same
procedure as for x Travel destination to set the home time zone.
E76
The Setup Menu
C
Time Zones
The camera supports the time zones listed below.
For time differences not listed below, set the camera clock using Time zone and date.
UTC +/-
Location
UTC +/-
Location
-11
Midway, Samoa
+1
Madrid, Paris, Berlin
-10
Hawaii, Tahiti
+2
Athens, Helsinki, Ankara
-9
Alaska, Anchorage
+3
Moscow, Nairobi, Riyadh,
Kuwait, Manama
-8
PST (PDT): Los Angeles,
Seattle, Vancouver
+4
Abu Dhabi, Dubai
-7
MST (MDT): Denver, Phoenix
+5
Islamabad, Karachi
-6
CST (CDT): Chicago,
Houston, Mexico City
+5.5
-5
EST (EDT): New York,
Toronto, Lima
+6
Caracas
+7
Bangkok, Jakarta
+8
Beijing, Hong Kong,
Singapore
-4.5
New Delhi
Colombo, Dhaka
-4
Manaus
-3
Buenos Aires, Sao Paulo
+9
Tokyo, Seoul
-2
Fernando de Noronha
+10
Sydney, Guam
Azores
+11
New Caledonia
London, Casablanca
+12
Auckland, Fiji
Reference Section
-1
±0
E77
The Setup Menu
Monitor Settings
Press the d button M z tab (A13) M Monitor settings
Option
Description
Image review
On (default setting): Picture is displayed on the monitor immediately
after shooting and the monitor display returns to shooting screen.
Off: Picture is not displayed immediately after shooting.
Brightness
Choose from five settings to select the monitor brightness. The
default setting is 3.
View/hide framing
grid
On: A boxed guide for framing is displayed.
Off (default setting): A boxed guide for framing is not displayed.
View/hide
histograms
On: Histograms are displayed in the shooting mode even when the
exposure compensation is not being set (A9, 74).
Off (default setting): Histograms are not displayed.
Reference Section
B
Notes on View/hide Framing Grid
Framing grid is not displayed in the following situations.
• When tracking a subject (after a subject is registered)
• When recording a movie
• When the enlarged center of the picture is displayed in E (manual focus)
B
Notes on View/hide Histograms
Histograms are not displayed in the following situations.
• When recording a movie
• When the enlarged center of the picture is displayed in E (manual focus)
• When the flash mode, self-timer or focus mode menu is displayed
• When borders for face detection (A85) are displayed
• When the subject tracking is being activated in AF area mode
E78
The Setup Menu
Print Date (Imprinting Date and Time on Pictures)
Press the d button M z tab (A13) M Print date
The shooting date and time can be imprinted on
pictures at the time of shooting. This information can be
printed even from printers that do not support printing
of the date and time (E56).
15/05/2012
Option
Description
f
Date
The date is imprinted on pictures.
S
Date and time
The date and time are imprinted on pictures.
k Off (default setting)
The date and time are not imprinted on pictures.
The icon for the current setting other than Off is displayed on the monitor (A8).
Notes on Print Date
• Imprinted dates cannot be deleted from the image, nor can dates be imprinted after the picture
has been taken.
• Dates cannot be imprinted in the following situations.
- When the scene mode is set to Easy panorama, Panorama assist or 3D photography
- When Pre-shooting cache, Continuous H: 120 fps or Continuous H: 60 fps is selected for
Continuous (E41) in the shooting menu
- During movie recording
• Dates imprinted with an Image size (A78) setting of f 640×480 may be difficult to read. Set
the image size to B 1600×1200 or higher.
• The date is recorded using the format selected in the setup menu’s Time zone and date option
(A26, E75).
C
Reference Section
B
Print Date and Print Order
When printing from DPOF-compatible printers which support printing of shooting date and
shooting information, the date and information can be printed on pictures without the date and
time being imprinted on them with Print date, using options in the Print order menu (E55).
E79
The Setup Menu
Vibration Reduction
Press the d button M z tab (A13) M Vibration reduction
Option
g
Description
Compensate camera shake that commonly occurs when
shooting at the telephoto zoom position or slow shutter speed.
Camera shake is also compensated when recording movies as
well as when shooting still images. The camera automatically
On
detects the panning direction and only compensates for vibration
(default setting) caused by camera shake.
When the camera is panned horizontally, for example, vibration
reduction only reduces vertical shake. If the camera is panned
vertically, vibration reduction only compensates for horizontal
shake.
k Off
Vibration Reduction is not enabled.
• When using a tripod to stabilize the camera, set vibration reduction to Off.
When On is selected, an icon for this setting is displayed on the monitor (A8).
Reference Section
B
Notes on Vibration Reduction
• After the power is turned on or the camera enters shooting mode from playback mode, wait until
the display stabilizes before shooting.
• Due to the characteristics of the vibration reduction function, images displayed on the monitor
immediately after shooting may appear blurry.
• Vibration reduction may be unable to completely eliminate the effects of camera shake in some
situations.
• When the Night landscape or Night portrait scene mode is set to Tripod, vibration reduction is
turned Off.
E80
The Setup Menu
Motion Detection
Press the d button M z tab (A13) M Motion detection
Enable motion detection to reduce the effects of camera shake and subject
movement when shooting still pictures.
Option
U
Description
If the camera detects the movement of the subject or camera
shake, the ISO sensitivity is raised and the shutter speed is
increased to reduce their effects.
However, motion detection does not function in the following
situations.
• When the flash fires
Auto
• In the following scene modes: j (Night landscape), c
(default setting)
(Landscape), W (Backlighting), Sports, Night portrait, Noise
reduction burst in Close-up, Fireworks show, Easy
panorama in Panorama, Pet portrait
• When u (special effects) is set to High ISO
monochrome
• When shooting mode is j, k, l, m or M
k Off
Motion detection is not enabled.
When Auto is selected, an icon for this setting is displayed on the monitor (A8).
The motion detection icon lights in green when the camera detects any vibration
and increases the shutter speed.
Reference Section
B
Notes on Motion Detection
• Motion detection may be unable to completely reduce effects of camera shake and subject
movement in some situations.
• Motion detection may not function if the subject exhibits significant movement or is too dark.
• The pictures taken may become grainy.
E81
The Setup Menu
AF Assist
Press the d button M z tab (A13) M AF assist
Enable or disable the AF-assist illuminator that assists the autofocus when the
lighting is dim.
Option
Description
Auto (default setting)
AF-assist illuminator lights automatically if the lighting is dim.
The illuminator has a range of about 4.0 m (13 ft) at the
maximum wide-angle position and about 2.1 m (6 ft 10 in.) at the
maximum telephoto position.
• Even if Auto is selected, the AF-assist illuminator does not
light depending on the position of the focus area or the scene
mode such as Museum (A50) and Pet portrait (A52).
Off
AF-assist illuminator does not light. The camera may be unable
to focus if lighting is dim.
Digital Zoom
Press the d button M z tab (A13) M Digital zoom
Enable or disable the digital zoom.
Reference Section
Option
Description
On (default setting)
When the camera is zoomed in to the maximum optical zoom
position, rotating and holding the zoom control toward g (i)
triggers the digital zoom (A31).
Off
The digital zoom is not activated.
B
Notes on Digital Zoom
• When the digital zoom is in effect, the camera focuses at the center of the frame.
• The digital zoom cannot be used when Scene auto selector, Portrait, Night portrait, Easy
panorama in Panorama, Pet portrait or 3D photography is selected in scene mode.
• This feature may not be used in combination with certain features. See “Features That Cannot Be
Used Simultaneously” (A80) for more information.
• When the digital zoom is in effect, Metering is set to Center-weighted or Spot.
E82
The Setup Menu
Assign Side Zoom Control
Press the d button M z tab (A13) M Assign side zoom control
Choose the function to be performed during shooting when the side zoom
control is used.
Description
Zoom (default setting)
When shooting, use the side zoom control (A31) to adjust the
zoom.
Manual focus
When the focus mode is set to E (manual focus), use the side
zoom control to focus (E2).
• Use the side zoom control in the direction of g to focus on
distant subjects.
• Use the side zoom control in the direction of f to focus on
near subjects.
Snap-back zoom
This is convenient when shooting at the telephoto position,
when it is more difficult to keep subjects in focus. Use the side
zoom control in the direction of f to zoom a specific increment
from the current zoom position toward the f side. Use it in the
direction of f again to move the zoom position further toward
f side. Use it in the direction of g to return to the original zoom
position, before the side zoom control was used.
• When using the digital zoom, use the side zoom control in the
direction of f to move to the telephoto end of the optical
zoom.
• If you perform any operation other than the side zoom
control, the zoom is not returned to the zoom position before
the operation.
• Snap-back zoom is not available during movie recording.
Reference Section
Option
E83
The Setup Menu
Sound Settings
Press the d button M z tab (A13) M Sound settings
Adjust the following sound settings.
Option
Description
Button sound
Set the following all sound settings to On (default setting) or
Off.
• Setting beep (beep sounds once when the settings are
completed)
• Focus beep (beep sounds twice when the camera focuses on
the subject)
• Error beep (beep sounds three times when an error is
detected)
• Start-up sounds
Shutter sound
Choose whether to set the shutter sound to On (default setting)
or Off.
B
Notes on Sound Settings
• In Pet portrait scene mode, even when On is set, the button sound and shutter sound are
disabled.
• Even when On is set, the shutter sound is disabled during movie recording.
• This feature may not be used in combination with certain features. See “Features That Cannot Be
Used Simultaneously” (A80) for more information.
Reference Section
Auto Off
Press the d button M z tab (A13) M Auto off
If no operations are performed for a certain period while the camera is on, the
monitor is turned off to save power and the camera enters standby mode (A25).
In this menu, set the time before the camera enters standby mode.
Choose from 30 s, 1 min (default setting), 5 min and 30 min.
C
Auto Off Setting
• In the following situations, the time taken for the camera to enter standby mode is fixed.
- When menus are displayed: three minutes (when auto off is set to 30 s or 1 min)
- During slideshow playback: maximum of 30 minutes
- When the AC Adapter EH-62A is connected: 30 minutes
• The camera does not enter standby mode when transferring images using the Eye-Fi card.
E84
The Setup Menu
Format Memory/Format Card
Press the d button M z tab (A13) M Format memory/Format card
Format the internal memory or a memory card.
Formatting permanently deletes all data in the internal memory or
memory card. The deleted data cannot be recovered. Be sure to transfer
important pictures to a computer before formatting.
Formatting the Internal Memory
To format the internal memory, remove the memory card from the camera. The
Format memory option is displayed on the setup menu.
Formatting Memory Cards
When a memory card is inserted in the camera, the memory card can be formatted.
The Format card option is displayed on the setup menu.
B
Formatting Internal Memory and Memory card
• Do not turn off the camera or open the battery-chamber/memory card slot cover during
formatting.
• The first time you insert a memory card that has been used in another device into this camera, be
sure to format it with this camera.
Press the d button M z tab (A13) M Language
Choose one of 29 languages for displaying the camera menus and messages.
Czech
Danish
German
(default
setting)
Dutch
Norwegian
Polish
Brazilian
Portuguese
Spanish
Portuguese
Greek
French
Indonesian
Italian
Hungarian
Russian
Romanian
Finnish
Swedish
Vietnamese
Turkish
Ukrainian
Arabic
Simplified
Chinese
Traditional
Chinese
Japanese
Korean
Thai
Hindi
Reference Section
Language
E85
The Setup Menu
TV Settings
Press the d button M z tab (A13) M TV settings
Adjust the settings for connecting to a TV.
Option
Description
Video mode
Select the analog video output system from NTSC or PAL in
accordance with your TV.
HDMI
Select a picture resolution for HDMI output from Auto (default
setting), 480p, 720p, or 1080i. When Auto is set, the output
resolution that is best suited to the connected TV is selected
automatically from 480p, 720p or 1080i.
HDMI device control
Select whether or not the camera receives signals from a TV
when a TV that conforms to the HDMI-CEC standard is
connected with an HDMI cable. When set to On (default setting),
the television remote control can be used to operate the camera
during playback.
See “Using the TV’s Remote Control (HDMI Device Control)”
(E24) for more information.
HDMI 3D output
Set the method used to output 3D pictures to HDMI devices.
Select On (default setting) to three-dimensionally play back 3D
pictures taken with this camera on a TV or monitor that is
connected via HDMI.
Reference Section
C
HDMI and HDMI-CEC
“HDMI” is an abbreviation of High-Definition Multimedia Interface, which is one type of multimedia
interface.
“HDMI-CEC” is an abbreviation of HDMI-Consumer Electronics Control, which enables operations to
be linked between compatible devices.
E86
The Setup Menu
Fn Button
Press the d button M z tab (A13) M Fn button
Assign the frequently used shooting menu to the w (FUNC) button (A2).
• This can be used when j, k, l, m or M is chosen for shooting mode.
Option
Image size (A78)
Description
Display the setting for image size.
Picture Control (E33)
Display the setting for Picture Control.
White balance (E38)
Display the setting for white balance.
Metering (E40)
Display the setting for metering.
Continuous (default
setting) (E41)
Display the setting for continuous shooting.
ISO sensitivity (E45)
Display the setting for ISO sensitivity.
AF area mode (E47)
Display the setting for AF area mode.
Reference Section
E87
The Setup Menu
Charge by Computer
Press the d button M z tab (A13) M Charge by computer
Select whether or not the battery inserted into the camera is charged when the
camera is connected to a computer via the USB cable (A90).
Option
Description
Auto (default setting)
When the camera is connected to a computer that is running,
the battery inserted into the camera is automatically charged
using power supplied by the computer.
Off
The battery inserted into the camera is not charged when the
camera is connected to a computer.
B
Notes on Connecting the Camera to a Printer
• The battery cannot be charged with connection to a printer, even if the printer complies with the
PictBridge standard.
• When Auto is selected for Charge by computer, it may be impossible to print images with direct
connection of the camera to some printers. If the PictBridge startup screen is not displayed on the
monitor after the camera is connected to a printer and turned on, turn the camera off and
disconnect the USB cable. Set Charge by computer to Off and reconnect the camera to the
printer.
B
Notes on Charging with Connection to a Computer
Reference Section
• The battery cannot be charged, nor can data be transferred, when the camera is connected to a
computer before the camera’s display language and date and time have been set (A26). If the
camera’s clock battery (A27) has been exhausted, the date and time must be reset before the
battery can be charged or images can be transferred with connection to a computer. In this case,
use the Charging AC Adapter EH-69P (A20) to charge the battery and then set the camera’s date
and time.
• If the camera is turned off, charging will also stop.
• If the computer enters sleep mode while charging, charging will stop and the camera may be
turned off.
• When disconnecting the camera from the computer, turn the camera off and then disconnect the
USB cable.
• It may take longer to charge the battery with connection to a computer than with charging using
the Charging AC Adapter EH-69P. Charging time increases when images are transferred while the
battery is charging.
• When the camera is connected to a computer, an application installed on the computer, such as
Nikon Transfer 2, may start. If the camera was connected to the computer for the sole purpose of
charging the battery, exit the application.
• The camera turns off automatically if there is no communication with the computer for 30 minutes
after the battery has finished charging.
• Depending upon computer specifications, settings, and power supply and allocation, it may be
impossible to charge the battery using a computer connection while it is inserted into the camera.
E88
The Setup Menu
C
The Charge Lamp
The following chart explains charge lamp status when the camera is connected to a computer.
Option
Description
Flashes slowly (green)
Battery charging.
Off
Battery not charging.
If the charge lamp changes from slow flashing (green) to off
while the power-on lamp is lit, charging is complete.
Flashes quickly (green)
• The ambient temperature is not suited to charging. Charge
the battery indoors with an ambient temperature of 5°C to
35°C (41°F to 95°F).
• The USB cable is not connected correctly, or the battery is
faulty. Make sure the USB cable is connected correctly and
replace the battery if necessary.
• The computer is in sleep mode and is not supplying power.
Wake up the computer.
• The battery cannot be charged because the computer cannot
supply power to the camera, due to the computer’s settings or
its specifications.
Reference Section
E89
The Setup Menu
Toggle Av/Tv Selection
Press the d button M z tab (A13) M Toggle Av/Tv selection
Switch the method for setting the flexible program, shutter speed or aperture
value.
• This feature can be used when shooting mode is set to j, k, l, m or M.
Option
Description
Do not toggle selection Use the command dial to set the flexible program or shutter
(default setting)
speed, and the multi selector to set the aperture value.
Toggle selection
Use the multi selector to set the flexible program or shutter
speed, and the command dial to set the aperture value.
Reset File Numbering
Press the d button M z tab (A13) M Reset file numbering
When Yes is selected, the sequential numbering of file numbers is reset (E98).
After resetting, a new folder is created and the file number for the next picture
taken starts from “0001.”
Reference Section
B
Note on Reset File Numbering
Reset file numbering cannot be applied when the folder number reaches 999 and there are
images in the folder. Insert a new memory card, or format the internal memory/memory card
(E85).
E90
The Setup Menu
Blink Warning
Press the d button M z tab (A13) M Blink warning
Choose whether or not blinking eyes are detected when using face detection
(A85) in the following shooting modes.
• In the following scene modes: Scene auto selector (A45), Portrait (A46)
or Night portrait (when Tripod is selected) (A47)
• Shooting modes j, k, l, m, M (when Face priority (E47) is selected for AF
area mode)
Option
Description
On
The Did someone blink? screen is displayed on the monitor if
the camera detects that a human subject may have closed the
eyes immediately after taking a picture using face detection. The
face of the human subject that may have closed his/her eyes is
framed by a yellow border. You can check the picture taken and
determine if you need to take the picture again.
Off (default setting)
The camera does not detect blinks.
The Did someone blink? Screen
B
Reference Section
• To zoom in the face for which blinking was detected,
Did someone blink?
rotate the zoom control toward g (i). To return to
full-frame playback mode, rotate the zoom control
toward f (h).
• When the camera detects that one or more human
Exit
subjects have closed their eyes, press J or K during
playback zoom to display other faces.
• Press the l button to delete the picture taken.
• Press the k button or the shutter-release button to return to shooting screen.
• If no operations are performed for a few seconds, the screen automatically
returns to the shooting screen.
Note on Blink Warning
This feature may not be used in combination with certain features. See “Features That Cannot Be
Used Simultaneously” (A80) for more information.
E91
The Setup Menu
Filmstrip
Press the d button M z tab (A13) M Filmstrip
Allows you to select whether or not filmstrips are displayed when you rotate the
multi selector quickly in full-frame playback mode (A34).
Option
Description
Image thumbnail is displayed at
the bottom of the monitor when
you rotate the multi selector
quickly while viewing an image in
full-frame playback mode.
You can view thumbnails of
previous and subsequent images,
and select an image.
While the filmstrip is displayed, you
can hide it by pressing the k button.
On
Off (default setting)
4
132
Disables the filmstrip.
Reference Section
B
Note on Filmstrip Display
In order to display the filmstrip, at least ten images must be saved in the camera’s internal memory
or on the memory card.
E92
The Setup Menu
Eye-Fi Upload
Press the d button M z tab (A13) M Eye-Fi upload
Option
Description
Enable
Upload images created by the camera to a preselected
destination.
Disable
(default setting)
Images will not be uploaded.
B
Notes on Eye-Fi Cards
C
Eye-Fi Communication Indicator
Reference Section
• Note that images will not be uploaded if signal strength is insufficient even if Enable is selected.
• Select Disable where wireless devices are prohibited.
• Refer to the instruction manual of your Eye-Fi card for more information. In the event of
malfunction, contact the card manufacturer.
• The camera can be used to turn Eye-Fi cards on and off, but may not support other Eye-Fi
functions.
• The camera is not compatible with the endless memory function. When it is set on a computer,
disable the function. If the endless memory function is enabled, the number of pictures taken may
not be displayed correctly.
• Eye-Fi cards are for use only in the country of purchase. Observe all local laws concerning wireless
devices.
• Leaving the setting as Enable will result in the battery being depleted in a shorter period of time.
The communication status of the Eye-Fi card in the camera can be confirmed on the monitor (A8).
• w: Eye-Fi upload is set to Disable.
• x (lights): Eye-Fi upload enabled; waiting to begin upload.
• x (flashes): Eye-Fi upload enabled; uploading data.
• z: An error occurred. The camera cannot control the Eye-Fi card.
C
Supported Eye-Fi Cards
As of November 2011, the following Eye-Fi cards can be used. Be sure that Eye-Fi card firmware has
been updated to the latest version.
• Eye-Fi Connect X2 SDHC 4GB
• Eye-Fi Mobile X2 SDHC 8GB
• Eye-Fi Pro X2 SDHC 8GB
E93
The Setup Menu
Reverse Indicators
Press the d button M z tab (A13) M Reverse indicators
Change the +/– display direction of the exposure indicator displayed when
shooting mode is m.
The + side of the indicators is set to the left and – side is set to the right in the
default setting.
Reset All
Press the d button M z tab (A13) M Reset all
When Reset is selected, the camera settings are restored to the default values.
Pop-up Menu
Option
Default value
Flash mode (A66)
Auto
Self-timer (A69)/
Smile timer (A70)
OFF
Focus mode (A72)
Autofocus
Exposure compensation (A74)
0.0
Reference Section
Shooting in the Scene Mode
Option
Default value
Scene menu (A41)
Scene auto selector
Night portrait (A47)
Tripod
Close-up (A49)
Single shot
Hue adjustment in Food mode (A50)
Center
Panorama (A51)
Normal (180°) in Easy panorama
Pet portrait (A52)
Pet portrait auto release: ON
Continuous: Continuous
Night Landscape Menu
Option
Night landscape (A42)
E94
Default value
Hand-held
The Setup Menu
Landscape Menu
Option
Landscape (A43)
Default value
Single shot
Backlighting Menu
Option
HDR (A44)
Default value
Off
Special Effects Menu
Option
Special effects (A55)
Default value
Soft
Shooting Menu
Option
Default value
Image quality (A77)
Normal
Image size (A78)
i 4608×3456
Picture Control (E33)
Standard
White balance (E38)
Auto (normal)
0
Metering (E40)
Matrix
Continuous (E41)
Single
Intvl timer shooting (E43)
30 s
ISO sensitivity (E45)
Auto
Minimum shutter speed (E45)
None
Exposure bracketing (E46)
Off
AF area mode (E47)
Auto
Autofocus mode (E51)
Single AF
Flash exp. comp. (E52)
0.0
Noise reduction filter (E52)
Normal
Active D-Lighting (E53)
Off
Zoom memory (E54)
Off
Startup zoom position (E54)
24 mm
Reference Section
Fine adjustment in white balance (E38)
Movie Menu
Option
Default value
Movie options (E64)
d HD 1080pP (1920×1080)
Autofocus mode (E68)
Single AF
E95
The Setup Menu
GPS Setting Menu
Option
Default value
Record GPS data (E69)
Off
Log interval (E71)
15 s
Log recording duration (E71)
Log data for next 6 hours
Setup Menu
Option
Default value
Welcome screen (E74)
None
Image review (E78)
On
Brightness (E78)
3
View/hide framing grid (E78)
Off
View/hide histograms (E78)
Off
Print date (E79)
Off
Vibration reduction (E80)
On
Motion detection (E81)
Auto
AF assist (E82)
Auto
Reference Section
Digital zoom (E82)
On
Assign side zoom control (E83)
Zoom
Button sound (E84)
On
Shutter sound (E84)
On
Auto off (E84)
1 min
HDMI (E86)
Auto
HDMI device control (E86)
On
HDMI 3D output (E86)
On
Fn button (E87)
Continuous
Charge by computer (E88)
Auto
Toggle Av/Tv selection (E90)
Do not toggle selection
Blink warning (E91)
Off
Filmstrip (E92)
Off
Eye-Fi upload (E93)
Disable
Reverse indicators (E94)
+0–
E96
The Setup Menu
Others
Option
Default value
Paper size (E27, E28)
Default
Frame intvl for Slide show (E57)
3s
Sequence display options (E63)
Key picture only
• Choosing Reset all also clears the current file number (E98) in the memory.
After resetting, numbering continues from the lowest number available in the
internal memory or the memory card. If Reset all is performed after all pictures
are deleted from the internal memory or memory card (A36), the file numbers
for the next pictures taken start from “0001.”
• The following settings remain unaffected even if Reset all is performed.
- Shooting menu: Custom Picture Control registration (E37), preset manual
data for White balance (E39)
- Setup menu: Time zone and date (E75), Language (E85) and Video
mode (E86) in TV settings
• User settings that were saved for mode dial M are not reset to the default
settings when Reset all is performed. To change these settings back to the
default settings, use Reset user settings (E53).
Firmware Version
Displays the current camera firmware version.
COOLPIX P510 Ver.X.X
Reference Section
Press the d button M z tab (A13) M Firmware version
Back
E97
File and Folder Names
Pictures, movies and voice memos are assigned file names as follows.
DSCN0001.JPG
Identifier
(not displayed on camera monitor)
Original still pictures (voice
memo attachment
included), movies
Small copies (voice memo
attachment included)
Cropped copies (voice
memo attachment included)
Pictures created with picture
editing other than cropping
and small picture and
attached voice memos,
movies created with movie
editing
DSCN
SSCN
RSCN
Extension
(signifies the file type)
Still pictures
Movies
Voice memos
3D pictures
.JPG
.MOV
.WAV
.MPO
File number (assigned automatically in
ascending order, starting with “0001”)
FSCN
Reference Section
• A folder for storing files is automatically created using the following naming
convention: “Folder number + NIKON” (e.g., “100NIKON”). If there are 200 files in
a folder, a new folder is created. (For example, the folder name following
“100NIKON” becomes “101NIKON.”) A new folder is also created when the file
numbers in a folder reach 9999 or Reset file numbering (E90) is performed.
The next file number is set automatically to “0001.”
If a folder contains no files, a new folder is not created even if Reset file
numbering is performed.
• Voice memo file names have the same identifier and file number as the picture
to which the voice memo is attached.
• In Panorama assist (E6), a folder is created for each shooting session using the
following naming convention: “Folder number + P_XXX” (e.g., “101P_001”).
Pictures are saved in sequence in file numbers starting from 0001.
• Each time a picture is taken in Interval timer shooting (E43), a folder named
with the convention: 'Folder number + INTVL' (e.g., 101INTVL) is created.
Pictures are saved in sequence in file numbers starting from 0001.
E98
File and Folder Names
• When image files or voice files are copied to or from the internal memory or
memory card (E62), the file naming conventions are as follows:
- Selected images:
Files copied using selected images are copied to the current folder (or to the
folder used for subsequent pictures), where they are assigned file numbers in
ascending order following the largest file number in memory.
- All images:
Files copied using all images, along with their folder, are copied together.
Folder numbers are assigned in ascending order, following the largest folder
number on the destination medium.
File names are not changed.
• When the current folder is numbered 999, if there are 200 files in the folder or if
a file is numbered 9999, no further pictures can be shot until the internal
memory or memory card is formatted (E85), or a new memory card is
inserted.
Reference Section
E99
Optional Accessories
Rechargeable
battery
Rechargeable Li-ion Battery EN-EL51
Charging AC
adapter
Charging AC Adapter EH-69P1, 2
Battery charger
Battery Charger MH-61
(Charging time when the battery is completely used up: Approx. two
hours)
AC Adapter EH-62A (connect as shown)
1
2
3
AC adapter
Before closing the battery-chamber/memory card slot cover, fully
insert the power connector cord into the slot in the battery chamber.
If part of the cord runs out of the groove, the cover or cord may be
damaged when the cover is closed.
Reference Section
USB cable
USB Cable UC-E61
Audio/video cable
Audio Video Cable EG-CP161
Lens cap
Lens Cap LC-CP241
Hand strap
Hand Strap AH-CP1
1 Included with the camera at the time of purchase. (See “Confirming the Package
Contents“ (Aii) for more information.)
2 When using in other countries, use a commercially available plug adapter as
necessary. For more information about plug adapters, consult your travel agency.
See our websites or product catalogs for up-to-date information on accessories for
the COOLPIX P510.
E100
Error Messages
The following table lists the error messages and other warnings displayed on the
monitor, as well as the solutions for dealing with them.
Display
A
Cause/Solution
O
(flashes)
Clock not set.
Set date and time.
E75
Battery exhausted.
Battery exhausted.
Charge or replace the battery.
18, 20
Battery temperature
high
Battery temperature is high.
Turn off camera, and allow battery to cool down before
resuming use. Five seconds after this message appears, the
monitor is turned off, and the power-on lamp, the AF/access
lamp and the flash lamp flash quickly. After the lamps flash for
three minutes, the camera turns off automatically, but you can
also press the power switch to turn it off manually.
25
The camera will turn
off to prevent
overheating.
Inside of the camera has become hot. The camera turns off
automatically.
Leave the camera off until the inside of the camera has cooled
and then turn it on again.
–
Q
(flashes red)
Camera cannot perform other operations until recording is
complete.
Wait until message clears from display automatically when
recording is complete.
Memory card is write Write-protect switch of the memory card is in “lock” position.
protected.
Slide the write-protect switch to “write” position.
Write-protect switch of Eye-Fi card is in “lock” position.
Slide the write-protect switch to “write” position.
Not available if Eye-Fi Error accessing Eye-Fi card.
card is locked.
• Use an approved card.
• Check that the terminal is clean.
• Confirm that memory card is correctly inserted.
This card cannot be
used.
This card cannot be
read.
Error accessing memory card.
• Use an approved card.
• Check that the terminal is clean.
• Confirm that memory card is correctly inserted.
32
86
–
–
–
Reference Section
Please wait for the
camera to finish
recording.
Camera cannot focus.
• Refocus.
• Use focus lock.
23
22
22
23
22
22
E101
Error Messages
Display
A
Cause/Solution
Memory card has not been formatted for use in this camera.
Card is not formatted. All data stored on the memory card is deleted when formatted.
Format card?
If there is any data on the card that you want to keep, select No,
22
Yes
and backup the data to a computer before formatting the
No
memory card. To format the memory card, select Yes and press
the k button.
Out of memory.
Image cannot be
saved.
Unable to create
panorama.
Unable to create
panorama. Pan the
camera in one
direction only.
Reference Section
Unable to create
panorama. Pan the
camera more slowly.
Memory card is full.
• Choose lower image quality or smaller image size.
• Delete pictures and movies.
• Replace memory card.
• Remove memory card and use internal memory.
77, 78
36, 100
22
23
Error occurred while recording picture.
Format the internal memory or memory card.
E85
Camera has run out of file numbers.
Replace the memory card, or format the internal memory/
memory card.
22,
E85
Picture cannot be used for welcome screen.
E74
There is insufficient space to save a copy.
Delete pictures from destination.
36
Cannot perform easy panorama shooting.
Easy panorama shooting may not be available in the following
situations.
• When shooting has not finished after a certain period of time E3
• When the camera movement speed is too fast
• When the camera is not straight relative to the panorama
direction
When taking 3D pictures, the second shot could not be
successfully taken after the first shot.
• Try shooting again. After taking the first shot, move the
E8
Failed to take second
camera horizontally and frame the subject so that it is aligned
shot
with the guide.
• In some shooting conditions, such as when the subject
–
moves or the subject is dark or low in contrast, the second
shot may not be taken.
E102
Error Messages
Display
A
Cause/Solution
Failed to save 3D
image
Failed to save the 3D pictures.
• Try shooting again.
• Delete unnecessary pictures.
• In some shooting conditions, such as when the subject
moves or the subject is dark or low in contrast, the second
shot may not be taken or the 3D picture may not be saved.
Sound file cannot be
saved.
A voice memo cannot be attached to this file.
• Voice memos cannot be attached to movies.
• Select a picture taken with this camera.
–
E61
Image cannot be
modified.
Cannot edit selected picture.
• Confirm the conditions that are required for editing.
• These options cannot be used with movies.
E15
–
Cannot record movie.
Time out error while recording movie.
Choose memory card with faster write speed.
23
Cannot reset file
numbering.
No more folders can be created.
Insert a new memory card, or format the internal memory/
memory card.
22,
E85
Memory contains no
images.
No pictures in the internal memory or memory card.
• To view the pictures stored in the internal memory, remove
the memory card.
• To copy pictures from internal memory to a memory card,
press the d button and select Copy from the playback
menu.
File contains no
image data.
22
E62
–
All images are hidden. No images available for a slide show.
–
This image cannot be Picture is protected.
deleted.
Disable protection.
E58
Travel destination is in
Destination in same time zone as home.
the current time zone.
E77
Mode dial is not in
the proper position.
Mode dial is between two modes.
Rotate the mode dial to select the desired mode.
28
Raise the flash.
The flash is lowered when the scene mode is Night portrait or 47,
44,
W (Backlighting) with HDR set to Off.
Press the m (flash pop-up) button to raise the flash.
66
Reference Section
This file cannot be
played back.
File not created with COOLPIX P510.
File cannot be viewed on this camera.
View file using the computer or any other devices which was
used to create or edit this file.
E8
36
–
E103
Error Messages
Display
A
Cause/Solution
The flash is lowered.
The flash is not raised during the scene auto selector.
Press the m (flash pop-up) button to raise the flash. The camera
45, 66
can still shoot normally with the flash lowered if you do not wish
to use it.
Lens error
Lens error occurred.
Turn the camera off and then on again. If the error persists,
contact retailer or Nikon-authorized service representative.
25
Communications
error
Error occurred during communication with printer.
Turn off camera and reconnect the USB cable.
E26
System error
Error has occurred in camera’s internal circuitry.
Turn off camera, remove and reinsert battery, and turn on
25
camera. If the error persists, contact retailer or Nikon-authorized
service representative.
Reference Section
Could not obtain GPS The camera clock is not set correctly.
data.
Change the location or time and determine the location again.
–
No A-GPS file found
on card
An A-GPS file that can be updated is not found in the memory
card.
Check the following items.
• Whether the memory card is inserted
• Whether the A-GPS file is stored in the memory card
• Whether the A-GPS file saved in a memory card is more
recent than the A-GPS file saved in the camera
• Whether the A-GPS file is still valid
–
Update failed
Unable to update A-GPS file.
The A-GPS file may be corrupted. Download the file from the
website once more.
E70
A memory card is not inserted.
Insert a memory card.
22
36 log data events have been already saved in one day.
–
100 log data events have been already saved.
Delete log data that is no longer required from a memory card
or replace the memory card with a new one.
E73
Printer error
Check printer. After solving the problem, select Resume and
press the k button to resume printing.*
–
Cannot save to card
Printer error: check
printer status.
E104
Error Messages
Display
A
Cause/Solution
Printer error: check
paper
Specified size of paper is not loaded.
Load the specified size of paper, select Resume and press the
k button to resume printing.*
–
Printer error: paper
jam
Paper has jammed in the printer.
Remove the jammed paper, select Resume and press the k
button to resume printing.*
–
Printer error: out of
paper
No paper is loaded in the printer.
Load the specified size of paper, select Resume and press the
k button to resume printing.*
–
Printer error: check
ink
Ink error
Check ink, select Resume and press the k button to resume
printing.*
–
Printer error: out of
ink
Ink cartridge is empty.
Replace ink cartridge, select Resume and press the k button
to resume printing.*
–
Printer error: file
corrupt
An error caused by the image file has occurred.
Select Cancel and press the k button to cancel printing.
–
* See the instruction manual provided with your printer for further guidance and information.
Reference Section
E105
E106
Technical Notes and Index
Caring for the Products .............................................F2
The Camera.............................................................................................................F2
The Battery..............................................................................................................F3
Charging AC Adapter..........................................................................................F4
The Memory Cards...............................................................................................F5
Caring for the Camera ...............................................F6
Cleaning...................................................................................................................F6
Storage .....................................................................................................................F6
Troubleshooting........................................................F7
Specifications...........................................................F15
Supported Standards....................................................................................... F18
Index .........................................................................F19
Technical Notes and Index
F1
Technical Notes and Index
Caring for the Products
The Camera
To ensure continued enjoyment of this Nikon product, observe the following
precautions when using or storing the device.
Be sure to read and follow the warnings of “For Your Safety” (Avi to Aviii)
thoroughly before using the products.
B
Keep Dry
The device will be damaged if immersed in water or subjected to high humidity.
B
Do Not Drop
The product may malfunction if subjected to strong shock or vibration.
B
Handle the Lens and All Moving Parts with Care
Do not apply force to the lens, lens cover, monitor, memory card slot, or battery chamber. These
parts are easily damaged. Applying force to the lens cover could result in camera malfunction or
damage to the lens. Should the monitor break, care should be taken to avoid injury caused by
broken glass and to prevent the liquid crystal from the display touching the skin or entering the eyes
or mouth.
B
Do Not Point the Lens at Strong Light Sources for Extended Periods
Avoid pointing the lens at the sun or other strong light sources for extended periods when using or
storing the camera. Intense light may cause deterioration of the image sensor, producing a white
blur effect in photographs.
Technical Notes and Index
B
Keep away from Strong Magnetic Fields
Do not use or store this device in the vicinity of equipment that generates strong electromagnetic
radiation or magnetic fields. Strong static charge or the magnetic fields produced by equipment
such as radio transmitters could interfere with the monitor, damage data saved on the memory card,
or affect the product’s internal circuitry.
B
Avoid Sudden Changes in Temperature
Sudden changes in temperature, such as when entering or leaving a heated building on a cold day,
can cause condensation to form inside the device. To prevent condensation, place the device in a
carrying case or a plastic bag before exposing it to sudden changes in temperature.
B
Turn the Product off Before Removing or Disconnecting the Power Source
or the Memory Card
Do not remove the battery while the product is on, or while images are being saved or deleted.
Forcibly cutting power in these circumstances could result in loss of data or in damage to product
memory or internal circuitry.
F2
Caring for the Products
B
Notes on the Monitor
• Monitors and electronic viewfinders are constructed with extremely high precision; at least 99.99%
of pixels are effective, with no more than 0.01% being missing or defective. Hence while these
displays may contain pixels that are always lit (white, red, blue, or green) or always off (black), this is
not a malfunction and has no effect on images recorded with the device.
• Images on the monitor may be difficult to see under bright lighting.
• The monitor is lit by an LED backlight. Should the monitor begin to dim or flicker, contact your
Nikon-authorized service representative.
The Battery
F3
Technical Notes and Index
• Be sure to read and follow the warnings of “For Your Safety” (Avi to Aviii)
thoroughly before using the battery.
• Check the battery level before using the camera and replace or charge the
battery if necessary. Do not continue charging once the battery is fully charged
as this will result in reduced battery performance. Whenever possible, carry a
fully charged spare battery when taking pictures on important occasions.
• Do not use the battery at ambient temperatures below 0°C (32°F) or above 40°C
(104°F).
• Charge the battery indoors with an ambient temperature of 5°C to 35°C (41°F to
95°F) before use.
• When the battery temperature is between 45°C and 60°C (113°F and 140°F), the
chargeable capacity may decrease.
• The battery is not charged at ambient temperatures below 0°C (32°F) or above
60°C (140°F).
• Note that the battery may become hot during use; wait for the battery to cool
before charging. Failure to observe these precautions could damage the
battery, impair its performance, or prevent it from charging normally.
• On cold days, the capacity of batteries tends to decrease. Be sure that the
battery is fully charged before heading outside to take pictures in cold weather.
Keep spare batteries in a warm place and exchange as necessary. Once warmed,
a cold battery may recover some of its charge.
• Dirt on the battery terminals can prevent the camera from functioning. Should
the battery terminals become dirty, wipe them off with a clean, dry cloth before
use.
Caring for the Products
• If the battery will not be used for some time, insert it in the camera and run it flat
before removing it for storage. The battery should be stored in a cool location
with an ambient temperature of 15°C to 25°C (59°F to 77°F). Do not store the
battery in hot or extremely cold locations.
• Always remove the battery from the camera or battery charger when it is not
being used. When inserted, minute amounts of current are drawn from the
battery even when not in use. This may result in excessive draining of the
battery and complete loss of function. Turning the camera on or off while the
battery is exhausted can result in reduced battery life. When the battery level is
low, be sure to charge the battery before using it.
• Recharge the battery at least once every six months and completely exhaust it
before returning it to storage.
• After removing the battery from the camera or battery charger, attach the
included terminal cover to the battery and store it in a cool place.
• A marked drop in the time a fully-charged battery retains its charge, when used
at room temperature, indicates that the battery needs to be replaced. Purchase
a new EN-EL5 battery.
• Replace the battery when it no longer holds a charge. Used batteries are a
valuable resource. Please recycle used batteries in accordance with local
regulations.
Charging AC Adapter
Technical Notes and Index
• Be sure to read and follow the warnings of “For Your Safety” (Avi to Aviii)
thoroughly before using the Charging AC Adapter.
• The Charging AC Adapter EH-69P is for use only with compatible devices. Do
not use with another make or model of device.
• The EH-69P is compatible with AC 100-240 V, 50/60 Hz electrical outlets. When
using in other countries, use a plug adapter (commercially available) as
necessary. For more information about plug adapters, consult your travel
agency.
• Do not, under any circumstances, use another make or model of AC adapter
other than Charging AC Adapter EH-69P or USB-AC adapter. Failure to observe
this precaution could result in overheating or in damage to the camera.
F4
Caring for the Products
The Memory Cards
F5
Technical Notes and Index
• Use only Secure Digital memory cards. See “Approved Memory Cards” (A23).
• Be sure to observe the precautions in the memory card documentation when
you use the memory card.
• Do not affix labels or stickers to the memory card.
• Do not format the memory card using a computer.
• When a memory card that has been used in another device is used for the first
time, be sure to format it with this camera.
When a new memory card is used, it is recommended to format it with this
camera first.
• Formatting permanently deletes all data in the memory card. Be sure to transfer
important pictures to a computer before formatting.
• If the error message “Card is not formatted. Format card?” is displayed when you
insert a memory card into this camera, the memory card must be formatted. If
the memory card contains images you wish to keep, select No and save those
images on your computer before formatting the memory card. To format the
card, select Yes and press the k button.
• Do not perform the following during formatting, while data is being written to
or deleted from the memory card, or during data transfer to a computer.
Failure to observe this precaution could result in loss of data or damage to the
memory card:
- Open the battery-chamber/memory card slot cover to remove the battery or
memory card.
- Turn off the camera
- Disconnect the AC adapter
Caring for the Camera
Cleaning
Avoid touching glass parts with your fingers. Remove dust or lint with a blower
(typically a small device with a rubber bulb attached to one end that is
pumped to produce a stream of air out the other end). To remove fingerprints,
oily substances, or other stains that cannot be removed with a blower, carefully
Lens/
wipe the lens with a dry soft cloth or eyewear cleaning cloth, using a spiral
viewfinder
motion that starts at the center of the lens and working toward the edges. Do
not wipe the lens forcibly or with a hard material. Failure to observe this
precaution could result in damage or trouble. If this fails, clean the lens using a
cloth lightly dampened with commercial lens cleaner.
Monitor
Remove dust or lint with a blower. To remove fingerprints, oily substances or
other stains, carefully wipe the monitor with a dry soft cloth or eyewear
cleaning cloth. Do not wipe the monitor forcibly or with a hard material. Failure
to observe this precaution could result in damage or trouble.
Body
Use a blower to remove dust, dirt, or sand, then wipe gently with a soft, dry
cloth. After using the camera at the beach or other sandy or dusty
environment, wipe off any sand, dust, or salt with a dry cloth lightly dampened
with fresh water and dry thoroughly. Note that foreign matter inside the
camera could cause damage not covered by the warranty.
Do not use volatile organic solvents such as alcohol or thinner, chemical
detergents, anticorrosive agents, or anti-fogging agents.
Storage
Technical Notes and Index
Remove the battery if the camera will not be used for an extended period. Do not
store the camera with naphtha or camphor moth balls, or in any of the following
locations:
• Next to equipment that produces strong electromagnetic fields, such as
televisions or radios
• Exposed to temperatures below –10°C (14°F) or above 50°C (122°F)
• Places that are poorly ventilated or subject to humidity of over 60%
To prevent mold or mildew, take the camera out of storage at least once a month.
Turn the camera on and release the shutter a few times before putting the camera
away again.
Be sure to read and follow the warnings given in “The Battery” (F3) of “Caring for
the Products” to store the battery.
F6
Troubleshooting
If the camera fails to function as expected, check the list of common problems
below before consulting your retailer or Nikon-authorized service representative.
Refer to the page numbers in the right-most column for more information.
• See “Error Messages” (E101) for more information.
Power, Display, Settings Issues
Problem
A
Cause/Solution
The battery
inserted in the
• Confirm all connections.
camera cannot be • Close the battery-chamber/memory card slot cover.
charged.
• Off is selected for Charge by computer in the setup menu.
• When charging by connecting the camera to a computer,
battery charging stops when the camera is turned off.
The battery cannot
• When charging by connecting the camera to a computer,
be charged by
battery charging stops when the computer is suspended
connecting the
(sleeping), and the camera may turn off.
camera to a
computer.
• Depending upon computer specifications, settings, and status,
charging the battery inserted in the camera may not be
possible via computer connection.
20
22
110, E88
E88
E88
–
Camera cannot be
turned on.
• Battery is exhausted.
24
• The camera cannot be turned on while connected to an
20
electrical outlet via the Charging AC Adapter.
• Camera cannot be turned on if the battery-chamber/memory 22
card slot cover is open.
Camera turns off
without warning.
• Battery is exhausted.
• If no operations are performed for a while, camera has turned
off automatically by auto off to save power.
• The camera turns off if the Charging AC Adapter is connected
while the camera is on.
• The camera turns off if the USB cable connecting the camera
to a computer or printer is disconnected. Reconnect the USB
cable.
• Inside of the camera has become hot. Leave the camera off
until the inside of the camera has cooled.
• At low temperatures, the camera and the battery may not
function normally.
24
Technical Notes and Index
25
20
90, 93,
E26
–
F3
F7
Troubleshooting
Problem
A
Cause/Solution
• Camera is off.
• Battery is exhausted.
• Standby mode for saving power: Press the power switch,
shutter-release button, c button or b (e movie-record)
button, or rotate the mode dial.
Monitor or
• Monitor and viewfinder cannot be used simultaneously. Press
viewfinder is blank.
the x button to alternate between displays.
• Camera and computer are connected via USB cable.
• Camera and TV are connected via audio/video cable or HDMI
cable.
• Interval timer shooting in progress.
25
24
25
16
90, 93
90, E23
E43
• Ambient lighting too bright: move to darker location or use
viewfinder.
• Adjust monitor brightness.
• Monitor is dirty. Clean monitor.
16
The viewfinder is
hard to see.
• Adjust diopter adjustment control.
16
Display does not
switch to monitor
(or viewfinder)
when the x
button is pressed.
• You cannot switch the display in the following situations:
- While recording or playing back movies
- While recording or playing back voice memos
- During interval timer shooting
- While connected to a printer
• You cannot switch the display while displaying a certain error
message.
96, 100
88
61
90
–
Date and time of
recording are not
correct.
• If the camera clock has not been set (“Date not set” indicator
flashes during shooting), still pictures have a time stamp of
“00/00/0000 00:00”; and movies are dated “01/01/12 00:00.” Set
the correct date and time using Time zone and date in the
setup menu.
• The camera clock is not as accurate as a normal clock, such as
watches. Check camera clock regularly against more accurate
timepieces and reset as required.
No information
displayed in
monitor.
Shooting and photo information may be hidden. Press the s
15
button until shooting data or photo information is displayed.
Print date not
available.
Time zone and date in the setup menu has not been set.
Monitor is hard to
see.
Technical Notes and Index
F8
108, E78
F6
26, 108
E75
108,
E75
26, 108,
E75
Troubleshooting
Problem
Cause/Solution
A
Date not
appearing on
• A shooting mode that does not support print date is selected. 108, E79
pictures even
• Another function that is set now is restricting the print date.
80
when Print date is • The date cannot be imprinted onto a movie.
–
enabled.
Screen for setting
time zone and
date is displayed
when camera is
turned on.
Clock battery is exhausted; all settings were restored to their
default values.
27
Camera settings
reset.
Reset file
numbering
cannot be done.
Reset file numbering cannot be applied when the folder
number reaches 999 and there are images in the folder. Change
the memory card, or format the internal memory/memory card.
Monitor is turned
off, and the poweron lamp flashes
quickly.
Battery temperature is high. Turn off camera, and allow battery to
cool down before resuming use. After the lamp flashes for three
25
minutes, the camera turns off automatically, but you can also
press the power switch to turn it off manually.
Camera
temperature rises.
When functions such as movie recording or sending images
using an Eye-Fi card are used for a long time, or when the camera
97
is used in a location with a high ambient temperature, the
camera temperature may rise. This is not a malfunction.
110,
E90
F9
Technical Notes and Index
b Electronically Controlled Cameras
In extremely rare instances, unusual characters may appear on the monitor and
the camera may stop functioning. In most cases, this phenomenon is caused by a
strong external static charge. Turn the camera off, remove and replace the battery,
then turn the camera on again. Note that disconnecting the power source as
described above may result in the loss of any data not recorded on the internal
memory or memory card at the time the problem occurred. Data already recorded
is not affected. In the event of continued malfunction, contact your retailer or
Nikon-authorized service representative.
Troubleshooting
Shooting Issues
Problem
Cause/Solution
A
90, 93,
E23,
E26
Cannot set to
shooting mode.
Disconnect the HDMI cable or USB cable.
No picture can be
taken.
• When camera is in playback mode, press the c button,
shutter-release button or b (e movie-record) button.
• When menus are displayed, press the d button.
• Battery is exhausted.
• When the scene mode is Night portrait or W (Backlighting)
with HDR set to Off, raise the flash.
• When flash lamp flashes, flash is charging.
Cannot take 3D
pictures
In some shooting conditions, such as when the subject moves or
the subject is dark or low in contrast, the second shot may not be –
taken or the 3D picture may not be saved.
Camera cannot
focus.
• Subject is too close to the camera. Try shooting with D (macro
close-up) in the focus mode, or Scene auto selector or
Close-up scene mode.
• The intended subject is one with which autofocus does not
perform well.
• Set AF assist in the setup menu to Auto.
• Subject is not in focus area when shutter-release button is
pressed halfway.
• The focus mode is set to E (manual focus).
• Turn camera off and then on again.
Technical Notes and Index
Colored stripes
appear on the
monitor when
shooting.
Pictures are
blurred.
Bright specks
appear in pictures
shot using flash.
F10
34
13
24
47, 44,
66
66
45, 49,
72
33
109, E82
32, 61
72
25
Colored stripes may appear when shooting subjects with
repeating patterns (such as window blinds); this is not a
malfunction.
–
The colored stripes will not appear in captured images or
recorded movies. However, when using Continuous H: 120 fps
or HS 120 fps (640×480), the colored stripes may be seen in
the captured images and recorded movies.
•
•
•
•
Use flash.
Use vibration reduction or motion detection.
Use D (Best Shot Selector).
Use a tripod to stabilize the camera (use with the self-timer for
better results).
Flash is reflecting off particles in air. Set the flash to W (off ).
66
108, 109
61
69
67
Troubleshooting
Problem
Cause/Solution
• Flash is set to W (off ).
Flash does not fire. • A shooting mode where flash cannot fire is selected.
• Another function that is set now is restricting the flash.
The digital zoom is
not available.
Image size not
available.
• Off is selected for Digital zoom in the setup menu.
• When Scene auto selector, Portrait, Night portrait, Easy
panorama in Panorama, Pet portrait or 3D photography
is selected in scene mode, the digital zoom cannot be used.
• Other functions that restrict the use of digital zoom are set.
Another function that is set now is restricting Image size.
• Off is selected for Shutter sound under Sound settings in
the setup menu.
No sound when
• Sports, Museum or Pet portrait is selected in scene mode.
shutter is released. • Other functions that restrict the use of the shutter sound are
set.
• Do not block the speaker.
A
67
75
80
109
46, 47,
51, 53
80
80
109
46, 50, 52
80
3
Off is selected for AF assist in the setup menu. Even when Auto
is set, AF-assist illuminator may not light depending on the focus 109
area position or scene mode.
Pictures appear
smeared.
Lens is dirty. Clean lens.
F6
Colors are
unnatural.
White balance does not match light source.
61, E38
Ring-shaped or
rainbow-colored
bands are seen on
the screen or the
shot image.
When the subject is backlit or when shooting with an extremely
bright light source in the display, such as in sunlight, ring-shaped
or rainbow-colored bands may appear on the image.
–
Change the position of the light source or remove it from the
display, and try shooting again.
The image taken
becomes grainy.
As the subject is dark, shutter speed is too slow or ISO sensitivity
is too high.
• Use flash.
66
• Specify a lower ISO sensitivity setting.
61, E45
F11
Technical Notes and Index
AF-assist
illuminator does
not light.
Troubleshooting
Problem
Pictures are too
dark
(underexposed).
Pictures are too
bright
(overexposed).
Cause/Solution
•
•
•
•
•
•
Flash is set to W (off ).
Flash window is blocked.
Subject is beyond flash range.
Adjust exposure compensation.
Raise the ISO sensitivity.
Subject is backlit. Raise the flash, and set the scene mode
W (Backlighting) with HDR to Off or set the flash mode to
X (fill flash).
Adjust exposure compensation.
A
67
30
66
74
61, E45
44, 66
74
When V (auto with red-eye reduction) or “fill flash with red-eye
reduction” of the Night portrait scene mode is applied during
Areas not affected
shooting, In-Camera Red-Eye Fix may, in very rare cases, be
by red-eye are also
47, 67
applied to areas not affected by red-eye. Set a flash mode other
corrected.
than V (auto with red-eye reduction), select a scene mode
other than Night portrait, and resume shooting.
Technical Notes and Index
Skin softening
results are not as
expected.
• Skin softening may not produce the desired results depending 54
on shooting conditions.
• For pictures with four or more faces, try using Skin softening 88,
in the playback menu.
E18
Saving images
takes time.
It may take more time to save images in the following situations.
• When the noise reduction function is in operation
• When flash is set to V (auto with red-eye reduction)
• When taking pictures in the following scene modes.
- Hand-held in j (Night landscape)
- Noise reduction burst in c (Landscape) or Close-up
- HDR set to other than Off in W (Backlighting)
- Hand-held in Night portrait
- Easy panorama in Panorama
• Continuous in the shooting menu is set to Continuous H:
120 fps or Continuous H: 60 fps
• When using smile timer while shooting
• When using Active D-Lighting while shooting
Cannot set or use
Continuous or
Exposure
bracketing.
Another function that is set now is restricting the Continuous
setting or Exposure bracketing.
80
Cannot set
COOLPIX Picture
Control.
Another function that is set now is restricting COOLPIX Picture
Control.
80
F12
–
67
42
43, 49
44
47
51
61,
E41
70
62, E53
Troubleshooting
Playback Issues
Problem
Cause/Solution
A
–
File cannot be
played back.
• File was overwritten or renamed by computer or another
make or model of camera.
• File cannot be played back during interval timer shooting.
• Movies recorded with cameras other than COOLPIX P510
cannot be played back.
Cannot play a
sequence.
• Pictures shot continuously with cameras other than COOLPIX
P510 cannot be played as a sequence.
• Check the Sequence display options setting.
–
• Playback zoom cannot be used with movies, small pictures, or
cropped copies of size 320 × 240 pixels or smaller.
Cannot zoom in on • Playback zoom may not be available for pictures taken with
cameras other than COOLPIX P510.
picture.
• 3D pictures cannot be enlarged when the camera is
connected via HDMI and they are played back in 3D.
61
96
89, E63
–
–
E8
Cannot record or
play back voice
memo.
• Voice memos cannot be attached to movies.
• Voice memos cannot be attached to pictures taken with
cameras other than COOLPIX P510, and voice memos
recorded by other cameras cannot be played back.
Pictures and
movies cannot be
edited.
• Confirm the conditions that are required for editing pictures or E16
movies.
E31
• Pictures and movies taken with cameras other than COOLPIX –
P510 cannot be edited.
Pictures are not
displayed on
television.
• Video mode or HDMI is not correctly set in the TV settings
setup menu.
• Cables are connected to both the HDMI mini connector and
USB/audio video connector.
• Memory card contains no pictures. Replace memory card.
Remove memory card to play back pictures from internal
memory.
110,
E86
90
•
•
•
•
•
25
24
90
–
91
The PictBridge
startup screen is
not displayed
when the camera
is connected to a
printer.
Technical Notes and Index
Nikon Transfer 2
does not start
when camera is
connected to a
computer.
Camera is off.
Battery is exhausted.
USB cable is not correctly connected.
Camera is not recognized by the computer.
Confirm that the operating system used is compatible with
the camera.
• Computer is not set to launch Nikon Transfer 2 automatically.
For more information on Nikon Transfer 2, refer to help
information contained in ViewNX 2.
100
88
22
94
With some PictBridge-compatible printers, the PictBridge startup
screen may not be displayed and it may be impossible to print
110,
images when Auto is selected for the Charge by computer
E88
option. Set the Charge by computer option to Off and
reconnect the camera to the printer.
F13
Troubleshooting
Problem
Cause/Solution
A
Pictures to be
printed are not
displayed.
• Memory card contains no pictures. Replace memory card.
22
• Remove memory card to print pictures from internal memory. 23
• Pictures taken by 3D photography cannot be printed.
E8
Cannot select
paper size with
camera.
Paper size cannot be selected from the camera in the following
situations, even for PictBridge compatible printers. Use the
printer to select paper size.
• The paper size selected using the camera is not compatible
with the printer.
• A printer that automatically sets the paper size is being used.
E27,
E28
–
GPS
Problem
A
Cause/Solution
Technical Notes and Index
Unable to identify
the location or it
takes time to
identify the
location.
• The camera may not be able to identify the location in some
shooting environments. To use the GPS feature, use the
camera as much as possible in an open-air area.
• When positioning for the first time, when positioning was
unable to be performed for about two hours, or after the
battery was changed, it takes a few minutes to obtain the
positioning information.
Unable to record
position
information on
shot images.
• When z or y is displayed on the shooting screen, the
102
position information is not recorded. Before shooting pictures,
make sure that the camera is receiving a GPS signal at
sufficient strength.
• Positional information cannot be recorded onto movies.
–
Difference
between the
actual shooting
location and
recorded position
information.
The acquired position information may deviate in some shooting
environments. When there is a significant difference in the
102
signals from the GPS satellite, there could be a deviation of up to
several hundred meters.
Unable to update
the A-GPS file.
–
• Check the following items.
- Whether the memory card is inserted
- Whether the A-GPS file is stored in the memory card
- Whether the A-GPS file saved in a memory card is more recent
than the A-GPS file saved in the camera
- Whether the A-GPS file is still valid
• The A-GPS file may be corrupted. Download the file from the E70
website once more.
103
103
–
• Be sure that a memory card is inserted in the camera.
–
• Up to 36 log data events can be recorded in a day.
Unable to save log
• Up to 100 log data events can be stored on a single memory E73
data.
card. Delete log data that is no longer required from a memory
card or replace the memory card with a new one.
F14
Specifications
Nikon COOLPIX P510 Digital Camera
Type
Effective pixels
Image sensor
Lens
Focal length
f/-number
Construction
Digital zoom
Vibration reduction
Autofocus (AF)
Focus range
(from lens)
Focus-area selection
Viewfinder
Frame coverage
(shooting mode)
Frame coverage
(playback mode)
Frame coverage
(shooting mode)
Frame coverage
(playback mode)
Storage
Media
File system
File formats
Internal memory (approx. 90 MB)
SD/SDHC/SDXC memory card
DCF, Exif 2.3, DPOF, and MPF compliant
Still pictures: JPEG
3D pictures: MPO
Sound files (voice memo): WAV
Movies: MOV (Video: H.264/MPEG-4 AVC, Audio: AAC stereo)
F15
Technical Notes and Index
Monitor
Compact digital camera
16.1 million
1/2.3-in. type CMOS; approx. 16.79 million total pixels
42× optical zoom, NIKKOR lens
4.3-180mm (angle of view equivalent to that of 24-1000 mm
lens in 35mm [135] format)
f/3-5.9
14 elements in 10 groups (4 ED lens elements)
Up to 2× (angle of view equivalent to that of approx. 2000 mm
lens in 35mm [135] format)
Lens shift
Contrast-detect AF
• [W]: Approx. 50 cm (1 ft 8 in.) to ∞,
[T]: Approx. 1.5 m (5 ft) to ∞
• Macro close-up mode: Approx. 1 cm (0.4 in.) (at a wide-angle
zoom position beyond G) to ∞
Face priority, auto (9-area automatic selection), center, manual
with 99 focus areas, subject tracking, target finding AF
Electronic viewfinder, 0.5-cm (0.2-in.) approx.
201k-dot equivalent LCD with the diopter adjustment function
(–4 to +4 m-1)
Approx. 100% horizontal and 100% vertical (compared to
actual picture)
Approx. 100% horizontal and 100% vertical (compared to
actual picture)
7.5-cm (3-in.), approx. 921k-dot, wide viewing angle TFT LCD
monitor with anti-reflection coating and 5-level brightness
adjustment, tiltable approx. 82° downward, approx. 90°
upward
Approx. 100% horizontal and 100% vertical (compared to
actual picture)
Approx. 100% horizontal and 100% vertical (compared to
actual picture)
Specifications
Image size
(pixels)
ISO sensitivity
(Standard output
sensitivity)
Exposure
Metering
Exposure control
Shutter
Speed
Technical Notes and Index
Aperture
Range
Self-timer
Built-in flash
Range (approx.)
(ISO sensitivity: Auto)
Flash control
Interface
Data transfer protocol
Video output
HDMI output
F16
•
•
•
•
•
16 M
4M
VGA
16:9 2M
1:1
4608×3456
2272×1704
640×480
1920×1080
3456×3456
•
•
•
•
8M
2M
16:9 12M
3:2
3264×2448
1600×1200
4608×2592
4608×3072
•
•
•
•
ISO 100, 200, 400, 800, 1600, 3200, Hi 1 (equivalent to 6400)
Auto (auto gain from ISO 100 to 1600)
Fixed range auto (ISO 100 to 400, 100 to 800)
Hi 2 (equivalent to 12800) (High ISO monochrome in
special effects mode)
224-segment matrix, center-weighted, spot
Programmed auto exposure with flexible program, shutter
priority auto, aperture-priority auto, manual, exposure
bracketing, motion detection, exposure compensation (–2.0 to
+2.0 EV in steps of 1/3 EV)
Mechanical and CMOS electronic shutter
Auto mode, scene mode, special effects mode
• 1/4000* to 1 s
• 1/4000* to 2 s (Tripod in Night landscape scene mode)
• 4 s (Fireworks show scene mode)
j, k, l, and m modes
• 1/4000* to 8 s (when ISO sensitivity is set to 100 in m mode:
including when set to Auto or Fixed range auto)
• 1/4000* to 4 s (when ISO sensitivity is fixed at 100, 200, or
400 in j, k, or l mode, and when ISO sensitivity is fixed at
200 or 400 in m mode)
• 1/4000* to 2 s (when ISO sensitivity is fixed at 800)
• 1/4000* to 1 s (when ISO sensitivity is fixed at 1600, and
when set to Auto or Fixed range auto in j, k, or l mode)
• 1/4000* to 1/2 s (when ISO sensitivity is fixed at 3200 or Hi 1)
• 1/4000 to 1/125 s (Continuous H: 120 fps)
• 1/4000 to 1/60 s (Continuous H: 60 fps)
* The aperture value is f/8.3.
Electronically-controlled 6-blade iris diaphragm
10 steps of 1/3 EV (W) (l, m mode)
Durations of 2 or 10 seconds can be selected
[W]: 0.5 to 8.0 m (1 ft 8 in. to 26 ft)
[T]: 1.5 to 4.5 m (5 ft to 14 ft)
TTL auto flash with monitor preflashes
Hi-Speed USB
MTP, PTP
Can be selected from NTSC and PAL
Can be selected from Auto, 480p, 720p, and 1080i
Specifications
I/O terminal
GPS
Supported languages
Power sources
Charging time
Battery life
(EN-EL5)
Tripod socket
Dimensions
(W × H × D)
Weight
Operating environment
Temperature
Humidity
Audio/video output; digital I/O (USB);
HDMI Mini Connector (Type C) (HDMI output)
Receiver frequency 1575.42 MHz (C/A code), geodetic system
WGS 84
Arabic, Brazilian Portuguese, Chinese (Simplified and
Traditional), Czech, Danish, Dutch, English, Finnish, French,
German, Greek, Hindi, Hungarian, Indonesian, Italian, Japanese,
Korean, Norwegian, Polish, Portuguese, Romanian, Russian,
Spanish, Swedish, Thai, Turkish, Ukrainian, Vietnamese
• One Rechargeable Li-ion Battery EN-EL5 (included)
• AC Adapter EH-62A (available separately)
Approx. 4 hours and 30 minutes (when using Charging AC
Adapter EH-69P and when no charge remains)
Still pictures1: Approx. 240 shots
Movies2: Approx. 1 h 10 min (HD 1080p P (1920×1080))
1/4 (ISO 1222)
Approx. 119.8 × 82.9 × 102.2 mm (4.8 × 3.3 × 4.1 in.) (excluding
projections)
Approx. 555 g (1 lb 3.6 oz) (including battery and SD memory
card)
0°C to 40°C (32°F to 104°F)
85% and below (no condensation)
• Unless otherwise stated, all figures are for a camera with a fully-charged
Rechargeable Li-ion Battery EN-EL5 operated at an ambient temperature of 25°C
(77°F).
1
F17
Technical Notes and Index
2
Based on Camera and Imaging Products Association (CIPA) standards for measuring the life
of camera batteries. Measured at 23 (±2)°C (73 (±4)°F); zoom adjusted with each shot, flash
fired with every other shot, image quality set to Normal, image size set to i 4608×3456.
Battery life may vary depending on shooting interval and length of time menus and images
are displayed.
When recording a single movie, the maximum recording time is 4 GB or 29 minutes, even
when there is enough free space on the memory card.
Specifications
Rechargeable Li-ion Battery EN-EL5
Type
Rechargeable lithium-ion battery
Rated capacity
DC 3.7 V, 1100 mAh
Operating temperature
0°C to 40°C (32°F to 104°F)
Dimensions
(W × H × D)
Approx. 36 × 54 × 8 mm (1.4 × 2.1 × 0.3 in.) (excluding
projections)
Weight
Approx. 30 g (1.1 oz) (excluding terminal cover)
Charging AC Adapter EH-69P
Rated input
AC 100-240 V, 50/60 Hz, 0.068-0.042 A
Rated output
DC 5.0 V, 550 mA
Operating temperature
0°C to 40°C (32°F to 104°F)
Dimensions
(W × H × D)
Approx. 55 × 22 × 54 mm (2.2 × 0.9 × 2.2 in.) (excluding plug
adapter)
For Argentina: Approx. 55 × 59 × 63 mm (2.2 × 2.4 × 2.5 in.)
For Korea: Approx. 55 × 59 × 66.5 mm (2.2 × 2.4 × 2.7 in.)
Weight
Approx. 55 g (2.0 oz) (excluding plug adapter)
For Argentina and Korea: Approx. 80 g (2.9 oz)
B
Specifications
• Nikon will not be held liable for any errors this manual may contain.
• The appearance of this product and its specifications are subject to change without notice.
Supported Standards
Technical Notes and Index
• DCF: Design Rule for Camera File System is a standard widely used in the digital
camera industry to ensure compatibility among different makes of camera.
• DPOF: Digital Print Order Format is an industry-wide standard that allows
pictures to be printed at a digital photo lab or with a household printer from
print orders stored on the memory card.
• Exif version 2.3: This camera supports Exif (Exchangeable Image File Format
for Digital Still Cameras) version 2.3, a standard that allows information stored
with photographs to be used for optimal color reproduction when images are
output from Exif-compliant printers.
See the instruction manual of the printer for further details.
• PictBridge: A standard developed cooperatively by the digital camera and
printer industries, allowing photographs to be output directly to a printer
without connecting the camera to a computer.
F18
Index
Symbols
A
R E7, E8
l Aperture-priority auto mode 57,
E10
k Apply selection button 5, 12
A Auto mode 28
o Backlighting 44
l Delete button 4, 6, 36, E61
s (display) button 5, 6, 15
o Exposure compensation 12, 74
m Flash mode 66
m Flash pop-up button 66
p Focus mode 72
w FUNC button 4, E87
c Landscape 43
m Manual mode 57, E11
d Menu button 4, 5, 13
x Monitor button 5, 6, 16
j Night landscape mode 42
c Playback button 4, 5, 34
i Playback zoom 35
j Programmed auto mode 57, E10
y Scene mode 41
n Self-timer/Smile timer 69, 70
k Shutter-priority auto mode 57, E10
u Special effects mode 55
g Tele 31
h Thumbnail display 5, 35
M User settings mode 63
f Wide 31
b (e movie-record) button 96
.JPG E98
.MOV E98
.MPO E98
.WAV E98
AC adapter 21, E100
Active D-Lighting 62, E53
AF area mode 61, E47
AF assist 109, E82
AF mode 62, E51
AF/access lamp 32
Aperture value 57
Aperture-priority auto mode 57, E10
Assign side zoom control 109, E83
Audio/video cable 90, E23
Audio/video-in jack E23
Auto 67
Auto bracketing 61, E41
Auto off 109, E84
Auto with red-eye reduction 67
Autofocus E68
Autofocus mode 62, 73, 99, E51,
E68
AV cable 90, E23, E100
3D photography 53
Backlighting 44
Battery 18, 22, E100
Battery charger E100
Battery level indicator 24
Battery-chamber/memory card slot cover
18, 22
Beach Z 48
Best shot selector 61, E42
Black and white copy n 50
Black border 88, E21
Blink warning 110, E91
BSS 61, E42
Button sound 109, E84
C
Calendar display 35
Charge by computer 110, E88
Charger 20, E100
Charging AC Adapter E100
Choose key picture 89, E63
F19
Technical Notes and Index
Numerics
B
Index
Close-up k 49
Command dial 4, 5
Computer 90
Continuous 61, E41
Contrast E35
COOLPIX Custom Picture Control 60,
E37
COOLPIX Picture Control 60, E33
Create log 105, E71
Crop E22, E31
Custom Picture Control 60, E37
D
Date and time 26, E75
Daylight saving time 27
Delete 36, E61
Digital zoom 31, 109, E82
Diopter adjustment control 16
Direct Print E25
D-Lighting 88, E17
DPOF printing E30
DSCN E98
Dusk/dawn i 48
E
Technical Notes and Index
Easy panorama 51, E3
Editing movies E31
Editing Pictures E15
Exposure mode 57
Extension E98
Extracting still pictures E32
Eye-Fi upload 111, E93
Eyelet for camera strap 7
F
Face detection 85
Face priority 61, E47
Features that cannot be used
simultaneously 80
File name E98
Fill flash 67
Filmstrip 110, E92
Filter effects 88, E19, E35
Fireworks show m 50
Firmware version 111, E97
F20
Flash 66
Flash exp. comp. 62, E52
Flash mode 66
Fn button 110
Focal length E54, F15
Focus 32, E47, E51
Focus area 32, E47
Focus mode 72
Folder name E98
Food u 50
Format 22, 109, E85
Format the internal memory 109, E85
Format the memory card 22, E85
FSCN E98
Full-frame playback 34
Full-time AF E51, E68
G
GPS options 105, E69
H
HDMI 110, E23, E86
HDMI 3D output E86
HDMI device control 110, E86
HDMI mini connector 20, 90, E23
HDR 44
Histogram 15, 108, E78
HS movie 99, E65, E66
I
Identifier E98
Image copy 88, E62
Image quality 77
Image sharpening E35
Image size 77, 78
Infinity 73
Internal memory indicator 24
Interval Timer Shooting 61, E42,
E43
ISO sensitivity 61, E45
L
Landscape 43
Language 109, E85
Lens F6, F15
Index
Lens cap 7
Li-ion rechargeable battery 18, E100
Lithium-ion type battery 20, E100
M
Macro close-up 73
Manual focus 73, E2
Manual mode 57, E11
Memory capacity 24
Memory card 22, 23
Memory card slot 22
Metering 61, E40
Microphone 96, E61
Minimum shutter speed 61, E45
Mode dial 11, 28
Monitor 6, 8, 10, F6
Monitor brightness 108, E78
Monitor settings 108, E78
Motion detection 109, E81
Movie length 96, 98
Movie options 99, E64
Movie playback 100
Movie recording 96
Multi selector 4, 5, 12, 65
Multi-shot 16 61, E42
Museum l 50
N
O
Off 67
Optical zoom 31
Optional accessories E100
P
Panorama assist 51, E6
Panorama p 51
Paper size E27, E28
Party/indoor f 48
Pet portrait O 52
PictBridge E25, F18
Q
Quick adjust E35
Quick retouch 88, E17
R
Rear-curtain sync 67
Rechargeable battery 18, E100
Recording slow motion movies E66
Reset all 111, E94
Reset file numbering 110, E90
Reset user settings 62, 64
Reverse indicators 111, E94
Rotary multi selector 4, 5, 12, 65
Rotate image 88, E60
RSCN E98
S
Saturation E35
Save user setting 62, E53
Scene auto selector x 45
Scene mode 41, 42
Selecting pictures E59
Self-timer 69
Self-timer lamp 69
Sequence E13
Sequence display options 89, E63
Setup menu 108
F21
Technical Notes and Index
Night landscape 42
Night portrait e 47
Noise reduction filter 62, E52
Number of exposures remaining 24, 79
Picture Control 60, E33
Playback 34, 100, E61
Playback menu 88
Playback mode 34
Playback zoom 35
Portrait b 46
Power 24, 25, 26
Power switch/power-on lamp 25
Pre-shooting cache 61, E41
Pressing halfway 4, 32
Print E25, E27, E28
Print date 108, E79
Print order 88, E55
Print order option E56
Printer 90, E25
Programmed auto mode 57, E10
Protect 88, E58
Index
Shooting 28
Shooting menu 60
Shutter sound 109, E84
Shutter speed 57
Shutter-priority auto mode 57, E10
Shutter-release button 4, 6, 32
Single 61, E41
Single AF E51, E68
Skin softening 54, 88, E18
Slide show 88, E57
Slow sync 67
Small picture 88, E20
Smile timer 70
Snow z 48
Sound settings 109, E84
Special effects mode 55
Sports d 46
SSCN E98
Subject tracking 61, E48, E50
Sunset h 48
Switching between tabs 14
T
Technical Notes and Index
Target finding AF 61, E49
Tele 31
Thumbnail playback 35
Time difference E77
Time zone 26, E77
Time zone and date 26, 108, E75
Toggle Av/Tv selection 110, E90
Toning E36
TV settings 110, E86
U
USB cable 20, 90, E26, E100
USB/audio/video output connector 20,
90, E23, E26
User setting modes 63
V
Vibration reduction 108, E80
Video mode 110, E86
View grid E34
View log 105, E73
View/hide framing grid 108, E78
F22
View/hide histograms 108, E78
Viewfinder 16, F6
ViewNX 2 91
Voice memo 88, E61
Volume 100
W
Welcome screen 108, E74
White balance 61, E38
Wide 31
Z
Zoom 31
Zoom control 4, 5, 31
Zoom memory 62, E54
F23
No reproduction in any form of this manual, in whole or in part
(except for brief quotation in critical articles or reviews), may be
made without written authorization from NIKON CORPORATION.
FX2E03(11)
© 2012 Nikon Corporation
6MM18711-03
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement